Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS

DIGITAL SYSTEM FOR AUTOMATIC COLLIMATION
Confidential Information
SERIES R 225 ACS DHHS
DATE OF ISSUE: REVISION LEVEL: ISSUED BY:
20.02.2019 D - 04.10.2021
LEGAL WARNING
THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL

IS CONFIDENTIAL. THE CONTENTS OF THIS
MANUAL, INCLUDING RALCO SRL
SOFTWARE AND THE COLLIMATOR ITSELF CANNOT
BE COPIED NOR REPRODUCED IN ANY WAY.
THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL MUST ONLY BE

USED FOR THE PROPER INTENDED USE, FUNCTION
AND MAINTENANCE OF THE RALCO COLLIMATOR.
RALCO DOES NOT EXPRESSLY OR IMPLICITLY GRANT ANY

PROPRIETARY RIGHTS OVER THE RALCO NAME NOR RIGHTS TO MARKET
THE RALCO COLLIMATOR BY ANY OTHER NAME.
RALCO SRL WILL PURSUE ANY AND ALL LEGAL REMEDIES AVAILABLE UNDER
THE LAW TO RECOVER DAMAGES INCURRED BASED UPON THE ABOVE
VIOLATION(S).
Model Certifications
R 225 ACS STANDARD VERSION
FDA CERTIFIED VERSION AVAILABLE ON

R 225 ACS DHHS REQUEST
Revision Level:
The English version of this manual is a translation of the Italian text which
prevails in case of doubts.
Rev. N Date N
A 15.11.2019 MRD/044/19
B 17.04.2020 MRE/005/20
C 14.01.2021 MRD/001/21
D 04.10.2021 ACD/012/21
THIS INSTRUCTION MANUAL PROVIDES THE SPECIFICATIONS, DIMENSIONS, AND FUNCTIONS FOR A STANDARD
COLLIMATOR. PERSONALIZATIONS ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. WITH PERSONALIZED COLLIMATORS, THE CUSTOMER
MUST ENSURE THE FOLLOWING HAS BEEN PROVIDED:
• YOUR SPECIFIC CODE IS CLEARLY VISIBLE ON THE BACK LABEL AFTER “CUSTOMIZATION”, ABOVE THE SERIAL
NUMBER, TO ENSURE THE CORRECT PERSONALIZED COLLIMATOR HAS BEEN PROVIDED (SEE ABOVE).
• THE CHAPTER ENTITLED “PERSONALIZATIONS,” WHICH INCLUDES RELEVANT INFORMATION REGARDING YOUR
PERSONALIZATION.
• OTHER PROVIDED ATTACHMENTS WHICH REFER TO YOUR PERSONALIZATIONS.
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION CANSYSTEM RALCO R 225 ACS

DESCRIPTION CAN BUS MESSAGES - COLLIMATOR COMMUNI-
CHARACTERISTICS ............................................8 CATION
SPECIFICATIONS Description....................................................93
QUICK START .................................................93
INSTALLATION CONTROL MESSAGES .....................................94
TUBE COMPATIBILITY ......................................16 STATUS MESSAGES ......................................105
MOUNTING THE FLANGE TO THE X-RAY TUBE .17 DISPLAY MESSAGES .....................................112
ALIGNMENT OF X-RAY TUBE FOCUS AND STATUS 0X100 .............................................114
COLLIMATOR...................................................19
Alignment Device ..........................................19
COMPLIANCE VERIFICATION
Mounting the Collimator to the Flange ..........20 MINIMUM FILTRATION REQUIREMENT .............116
VERIFICATION OF CORRECT INSTALLATION ......23 Visual Determination of Half-Value Layer
(HVL) ..........................................................117
Ionization Chamber Mounting .......................23
Quick-Check of Minimum Filtration
ELECTRICAL CONNECTION ...............................26
Requirement at a Particular kVp.................117
Power Supply Connection ............................27
Standard Absorber Method ........................117
Wiring Diagram .............................................28
VISUAL DEFINITION OF X-RAY VERSUS LIGHT
Cable ............................................................30
FIELD ...........................................................118
OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FIELD SIZE INDICATION .................................118
RADIOGRAPHY ................................................31 CROSSHAIR ALIGNMENT ................................119
Automatic Square-Field Operation Mode (Long CHAPTER- ADJUSTMENTS, PARAGRAPH
and Cross Shutters) ......................................31 CROSSHAIR ALIGNMENT................................119
Manual Mode ................................................32 LIGHT FIELD ILLUMINATION INTENSITY ............119
Manual Mode - Key Set ................................32 EMC COMPLIANCE .......................................119
Exposure Hold Mode (Red Light) .................33 Electromagnetic Emissions.........................120
Inclinometer HOLD Mode .............................33 Electromagnetic Immunity for All Equipment
Light Field Operation ....................................33 and Systems ...............................................121
CALIBRATION Frequency Range and Level: RF wireless
communication EQUIPMENT .....................121
CENTERING X-RAY BEAM WITH COLLIMATOR
LIGHT .............................................................34 COVER REMOVAL
LIGHT FIELD TO X-RAY FIELD ALIGNMENT ........35
VERTICAL ALIGNMENT .....................................36
ADJUSTMENTS
Longitudinal Alignment (Long) ......................36 EXTRA-FOCAL SHUTTERS .............................125
Transversal Calibration (CROSS).................36 CROSSHAIR ADJUSTMENT .............................128
LASER LIGHT ADJUSTMENT ...........................129
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
RSR008 BOARD.............................................38
TROUBLESHOOTING
Characteristics ..............................................38 SUBSTITUTIONS
GC-LED-4A...................................................41 LED SUBSTITUTION ......................................135
SYSTEM START-UP Replacing the Previous Version LED..........136
Replacing the New Version LED ................137
DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION CONTROLS .47
SUBSTITUTION OF THE ELECTRONIC BOARD
Data Writing ..................................................47
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS -
Data Reading ................................................47 RSR008 ......................................................137

UPDATING OF FIRMWARE ................................48 SUBSTITUTION OF THE ELECTRONIC BOARD FOR
LED.............................................................138
Functional Overview .....................................48
Bill of Material ...............................................48 SUBSTITUTION OF SQUARE FIELD MOTORS ....139
Installation.....................................................49 SUBSTITUTION OF THE MIRROR .....................140
Workflow .......................................................49 SPARE PARTS
HW Setup .....................................................50 Labels .........................................................141
Copy .............................................................50 PARTS BREAKDOWN .....................................145
Install ............................................................51
Issues List.....................................................51
OPTIONAL ITEMS
POTENTIOMETER POSITIONING ALARMS ...........52 RO 002 Iron Mounting Flange Spacer ........146
RO 063 Final Quality Test Report
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS i

Documentation............................................146 RO 541 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange ...232
RO 074 External housing and guide rails in RO 544 7” Touchscreen Display.................232
customized color .........................................146 RO 545 Front silkscreen with six double-
RO 082 Glass Mirror...................................147 safety touch buttons ...................................241
RO 096 Wiring Customization ....................147 RO 552 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange ...242
RO 107 Knob Color Customization.............147 RO 570 Shutter position verified by
RO 111 Front panel customization .............147 encoders .....................................................242
RO 203 Self-centering top-cover bracket for RO 575 Iron Mounting Flange Spacer ........243
Siemens X-Ray tube ...................................147 RO 587/2 Two lasers (one mounted externally)
RO 210 Aluminium Acessory Guides .........148 forming a crosshair to center the patient to the
RO 240 Focal-spot to skin spacer ..............148 collimator: Class 1 ......................................243
RO 242/1 Single Laser Line to align collimator RO 599 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with
and detector center: Class 2 .......................149 Position Indicator ........................................246
RO 242/2 Two lasers (one mounted externally) RO 603 Shutter blocking screws ................248
forming a crosshair to center the patient to the RO 605 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with
collimator: Class 2 ......................................150 Position Indicator ........................................248
RO 278 Fixed Near Focal Shutters.............152 RO 609 Self-Centering Top-Cover Bracket with
RO 305 Additional Variable Filtration - Zero Position Output Signal........................248
Automatic Selection ....................................153 RO 610 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with
RO 305/1 Additional Variable Filtration.......154 Position Indicator ........................................258
RO 308 External Board ASR003 ................154 RO 611 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange with
RO 310 Round field collimation for image Position Indicator ........................................259
intensifier ....................................................181 RO 619 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with
RO 314 Camera assembled internally ........187 Position Indicator ........................................260
RO 320 Motorized rotation of collimator .....193
MAINTENANCE
RO 329 Internal Proximity Sensor ..............198
CLEANING RECOMMENDATIONS .....................261
RO 330 Connecting cable extension ..........200
DISINFECTION ...............................................261
RO 332/A Resin Rotating Mounting Flange201
RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROGRAM .....261
RO 337 Mechanical arrangement for digital
camera assembling.....................................201 GENERAL
RO 344 Accessory guide rail spacers with WARRANTY...................................................263
reinforced support .......................................202 REPAIRS.......................................................263
RO 356 Shutter position verified by END OF LIFE DISPOSAL .................................264
potentiometer ..............................................202 DISASSEMBLY ...............................................264
RO 409 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange ...202 TRANSPORT AND STORAGE ...........................264
RO 428 Touchscreen Display .....................203 SAFETY/RESPONSIBILITY ...............................265
RO 436 Reduction of housing height..........203 RESIDUAL RISKS ...........................................266
RO 441 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange ...204
RO 444 Can Open Protocol........................205
RO 445 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange ...205
RO 452 Manual-Image Stitching on LONG
Shutters ......................................................206
RO 470 High precision ball bearing shutter
movement ...................................................207
RO 481 Internal Rotating Square Field.......208
RO 492 Adjustable Top-Cover Bracket ......209
RO 495 Camera assembled internally for
patient monitoring .......................................216
RO 498 Self-Centering Top-Cover Bracket with
Zero Position Output Signal........................222
RO 499 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with
Position Indicator ........................................230
RO 502 Camera assembled internally for
patient monitoring .......................................230
RO 518 Additional Variable Filtration..........231

ii
iii
iv
Model R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS
INTRODUCTION
General Safety Information

Ralco products are designed and manufactured to meet the international safety standards for medical equipment.
However, all medical electrical equipment requires proper installation, operation and servicing, particularly with regard to
human safety.
Read, note, and strictly observe all safety tags on the equipment. Strictly observe all safety directions, all warnings and all
cautions that are mentioned in this chapter and throughout this service documentation. In order to protect the personal
health of service personnel, operators and patients, ensure the safe servicing and operation of the system.
Intended Use of the Collimator

This collimator is designed to be used with a Radiological system producing ionizing radiation for medical or veterinary
use. Whomever is authorized to operate or service the radiological equipment must be thoroughly familiar with the
procedures related to radiation protection and equipment use and maintenance.
Ralco is not responsible for any personal injuries or damage to property from misuse or unintended use of this collimator.
This manual must be made available to the installer and operator.
Installer and Operator Responsibility

The installer and operator must verify that ALL safety standards are followed immediately after installation of the
collimator and before any subsequent use. All procedures regarding the installation and safe use of this collimator must
be strictly followed.
X-ray equipment manufacturer responsibility

If the X-ray equipment manufacturer does not use the READY signal, allowing X-ray exposures regardless of collimator
state or status, all liability falls upon the X-ray equipment manufacturer. In the event of any emergency and the READY or
ERROR signals are bypassed allowing X-ray exposures, all the liability falls upon the X-ray equipment manufacturer.
The collimator electronics supplies a signal defined as READY. The X-ray equipment manufacturer will manage this
signal as the X-ray consent. In the event of a collimator failure, the liability for the correct bypass of this signal, in order to
always ensure the X-ray consent, devolves upon the X-ray equipment manufacturer.
Reporting
Information regarding accidents that have occurred while using this collimator must be reported immediately to Ralco, srl.
Limitation of Liability
Ralco is not liable if the provided instructions are not complied with. Furthermore, Ralco is not liable if one or several of
the following instances apply:
If the unit is specifically designed per client specifications and the certification was the duty of the client;
The collimator was modified in any way by the OEM or operator;

The collimator was installed without respecting the instructions, as provided in this manual;
The collimator was used in a way outside its intended use;
The collimator was not installed by competent personnel;

The collimator was not operated safely or in a way contrary to the instructions in this manual;
The collimator was not subject to routine inspection and maintenance by competent personnel;
The collimator was repaired with non-Ralco spare parts;
The Collimator was Used in a Way Not Reasonably Foreseen by Ralco

Ralco is not liable for any direct or indirect damage caused if the procedures in this manual are not followed.
The collimator complies with current standards for static load, a non-wearing class. This statement is based on
studies and tests performed on the collimator performance and its weight. If the final system, through tilting movements
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Introduction
or other dynamic movements, increases the risk factor other than those studied and tested, it is the responsibility of the
customer to ensure that there are no dangerous situations.
The collimator described here, is used on Radiological systems and is classified as a type IIB according to Attachment IX.
The collimator has been designed and manufactured in compliance to Attachment II of Legislative Decree, 2 February
1997, N. 46, Implementation of Directive 93/42/CEE of 14 June 1993 and successive modifications applying Directive
2007/47/CE.
List Applicable Standards and to which Ralco adheres to:
IEC 60601-1:2005 + Am1:2012 (ed. 3.1), North American market deflections (US+CA)
IEC 60601-1-2:2014 (ed 4)
IEC 60601-1-3:2008 + Am1:2013 (ed. 2.1)
IEC 60601-2-54:2009 + Am1:2015 (ed. 1.1)
IEC 60601-2-45:2011 + Am1:2015 (ed. 3.1) Applicable in Mammography instead of IEC 60601-2-54:2009
IEC 60601-1-6:2010 + Am1:2010 (ed. 3.1) (Usability)
IEC 62304:2006 + Am1:2015 (ed. 1.1) (Software)
IEC 60825-1:2014 (LASER - if applicable)
IEC 62471:2006 (LED - if applicable)
ISO 9001:2015
ISO 13485:2016
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INTRODUCTION

MANUALE ISTRUZIONI / INSTRUCTION MANUAL 1
21 CFR subchapter J (FDA)

8750 01 & 8750 81 (CSA)
CE
*Ralco can provide documentation regarding its adherence to any of the above standards.
EN 60601-1 par. 5
Protection against electric hazards: "Class I" equipment.
Protection against direct and indirect contacts: Type B equipment with applied parts.
Protection against water see page: "Common equipment".
Safety of operation in the presence of inflammable anaesthetics with air or oxygen or nitrous oxide: Equipment not suited
to application in the presence of inflammable anaesthetic mixtures containing air or oxygen or nitrous oxide.
• Operation conditions: Equipment for continuous operation at intermittent loads - See Chapter Operation Instructions.
• Should label data on the collimator not correspond to the specifications herein, inform Ralco of the non conformity.
• Verifications of the specifications are to be performed according to the indicated equipment standards.
Inherent Danger of X-Rays

The collimator has been constructed to current standards to meet the safety requisites of Directive 2007/47/CE and all
other applicable standards. However, due to Radiology being an inherent dangerous activity which cannot be completely
safe guarded against, it is crucial that all safety procedures are followed. The installer and operator must follow ALL
established procedures (including those mentioned in this manual) to reduce the inherent danger of X-Rays.
The inherent risk of using collimators in Radiological systems is deemed reasonable as determined by applicable
standards. The use of collimators for Radiological systems is strictly regulated. Ralco follows all applicable standards. It
is up to the installer and operator to ensure that all possible steps are followed to ensure the health and safety of the
patient and operator.
The contact with the moving parts can be considered impossible and may occur only during installation or maintenance
(low hazard). The internal parts are protected by a mechanical safeguard in the form of a metal or plastic sheath which
impedes access. Also motor units are not accessible as knobs are fixed using the Allen screws and can be removed only
by using a tool, in accordance with paragraph 5.92.3 of EN 60601-1 and EN 60601-2-54 par. 201.9.2.2.5. In addition the
collimator has been tested in accordance with EN 60601-1, paragraph 4.8.2
Read all information in this chapter carefully.

You are responsible to take safety precautions and to follow the safety instructions. Thus, you can prevent harm
form yourself and other persons.
TECHNICALLY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY!
• Only technically qualified Field Service Engineers (FSEs) must do the service work. The FSEs must be appropriately
and successfully trained and instructed.
• Perform all service tasks such as installation, maintenance, or repair in strict compliance with the provided safety
instructions!
• Perform all action as for example unpacking, installation, setting to work, testing and replacement according to the
sequence stated in this manual.
• Perform all service tasks in strict compliance with the local regulations concerning safety, health, accident preven-
tion, and medical X-ray devices!
• Never change any system parameters or components that reduce the mechanical safety, electrical safety, radiation
protection properties of the product!
• Do not modify this equipment without authorization of Ralco.
Any unauthorized modification can cause malfunction or deterioration of performance and quality and can therefore
lead to personal injury, clinical misdiagnosis or clinical mistreatment.
• Never leave problems unsolved that may affect the safety of the product!
• Order spare parts via Ralco distribution channel.
• Always perform all relevant safety checks before handing the product over to the customer!
• Keep in mind that certain details or procedures change since you previously installed or serviced a similar product!
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of death or serious injury.
A temperature of the collimator cover, under normal operating conditions and at the maximum ambient operating
temperature (40°C), could exceed 41°C. According to the Table 24 of the General IEC 60601-1 standard, contact with the
collimator cover must be less than 1 minute, both for the operator and for the patient. During the diagnostic test the
operator must pay attention that the patient does not come into contact with the collimator surface for more than 1 minute.
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of serious injury.

Precautions Against Mechanical Hazards

SAFE HANDLING OR ROTATING MACHINERY
• Never service rotating machinery, bands or chains when rotational movements are activated.
• Make sure that the rotational movements are switched off.
• Make sure that nobody can switch on the movements accidentally.
• Block the movement, if necessary.
Safe handling of tilting machinery
• Never service tilting machinery when tilting movements are activated or brakes are released.
• Make sure that the tilting movements are switched off.
• Make sure that nobody can switch on the movements accidentally.
• Block the movements, if necessary.
If you tilt the machinery during installation or during other service activities:
• Comply with the specific service instructions.
• Ask a second person to release the brake and to keep the tilting movement under control.
• Avoid uncontrolled tilting movement.
• Never release the brake longer than necessary.
Hazard of physical injury caused by heavy loads

• Wear appropriate protective clothing, such as safety boots an gloves.
• Take care that heavy loads are correctly lifted or carried to avoid any physical injury.
• Ask other persons for help to handle very heavy or awkwardly shaped loads.
• Use mechanical devices whenever it is possible.
• Stick to the installation instructions regarding:
• suitable tools
• lifting devices
• lifting/support points
• particular safety measures
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of property damage.
Safe handling of light source

Light source and adjacent parts can be very hot. They can cause severe burns.
• Never touch the light source, light source socket, or light source bracket with your fingers immediately after use.
• Leave the light source and adjacent parts to cool down before handling them.
Precautions Against Electrical Hazards
Hazard of electrical shock during service tasks

During installation , maintenance, and other service tasks there is a risk of electrical hazards.
• Follow the general instructions provided in this chapter.
General precautions against electrical hazards

• Switch off the mains supply.
• Make sure that nobody can switch on the system accidentally before you start.
• Make sure that all UPS-powered components are powerless.
• Use a voltmeter to verify that all line disconnects are opened.
• Remove all jewellery, such as bracelets, or rings to prevent short circuits.
Precautions concerning installation and service

Electrical installations of medically used rooms must comply with the requirements of each country.
Follow the instructions provided on the installations sheets for the specific project.
• Always use a separate conductor for ground connection. The neutral conductor is not considered as ground
connection.
• Do not use a three-to-two pins adapter to connect equipment provided with a power cord. Always connect the
equipment to properly grounded, three-pin power outlets.
• Connect the system to the mains as late as possible during installation.
• Make sure that all protective earth conductors are installed and connected before first switching on the system.
• Always be sure that the power is switched off when installing any parts to the equipment.
• Make sure that the large internal capacitors are completely discharged. Discharging can take several minutes.
• Keep away water or other liquids from the inside or the equipment to avoid short-circuits or corrosion.
• After installation or service work on electrical components the following test have to be performed to ensure the
compliance with IEC 62353:
• Touch voltage
• Protective earth conductor resistance
• Earth leakage measuring

Working when connected to voltages

• Switch off the main power supply when working at the equipment. This rule does not apply for certain measuring and
adjustment procedures that are only possible when the product is switched on.
• Never measure or adjust equipment with power-on unless another person is present.
• Be very careful when working close to live contacts.
• Never perform any work on live parts (> 50 V).
• Prevent unwanted or sudden movements of the system because they are dangerous. If the procedure involves
mechanical movements, take every precaution especially when working with moving and rotating parts. Use the
service switch or the EMERGENCY STOP button before working within the dangerous movement area of a product.
• Check the ground connections before touching conductive system parts.
• Use tools and measuring instruments, which are suitable for the respective procedure only.
• Make sure that est and adjustment points re accessible without any risk of injury. If safe access is not possible,
switch off the system.
• Turn off the power supply immediately after finishing the test or adjustment procedure.
Safe handling of high-voltage cables

• When the mains and auxiliary power supplies are disconnected: Wait at least two minutes before removing the
flexible high-voltage cables from the X-ray tube housing or the generator.
• Discharge any residual charge before touching the contact pins (briefly connect them to ground).
Precaution Against Material Damage

ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS FOR SAFE OPERATION
• The oxygen content of the ambient air during operation must be lover than 25%!
• The X-ray equipment must not be operated along with combustible anaesthesia substances!
• Ensure that the indoor temperature is within +10 - +40°C.
• Ensure that the indoor relative humidity is within 10 - 75%.
• Ensure that the air pressure is within 700 - 1060 hPa
Cleaning and disinfection

• Do not use aggressive cleaning agents to clean the product!
• When you use cleaning agents such as detergents and disinfectants, make sure that they do not contain explosive
substances as they can create explosive gas mixtures!
• Obey the manufacturer’s data of the cleaning agent and disinfectant!
• Obey the manufacturer’s data of the cleaning clothes!
Malfunction through electromagnetic fields

The equipment fulfils all requirements concerning electromagnetic compatibility (EMC).
nevertheless, powerful high frequency transmitters used near the electronic components can cause malfunction of
electronic components under unusual circumstances. This malfunctions causes unwanted risks for patients, operators,
and service personnel.
• Switch off your mobile phone in designated areas.
Processor overheating
The processor can get damaged within a few seconds.
• Do not operate the processor without cooling.
Damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

ESD can destroy or partially damage electrostatic sensitive devices such as printed circuit boards (PCB). The damage can
lead to instant or later failures of the device.
• Read all the following instructions concerning ESD protection.
• Take all necessary precautions to protect electrostatic sensitive devices.
The rules concerning ESD protection apply to new devices and old devices and old devices. Old devices are replace and
sent back to the service depot.
Additional symbols on the collimator (if applicable)
or AC Alternating Current No. 01-14 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 503
or DC Direct Current No. 01-18 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5031

or AC/DC Alternating and Direct Current No. 01-19 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5033
Protective Ground No. 01-20 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5019
Plus, Positive Polarity No. 01-27 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5019
Minus, Negative Polarity No. 01-28 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5006
Input No. 01-36 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5006
Output No. 01-37 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5034
Remote Control No. 01-38 Ref.
Manual Control No. 01-45 ISO 7000-096
Automatic Control (Closed Loop) No. 01-46 ISO 7000-0017
Iris Diaphragm: Open No. 01-69 ISO 7000-0017
Iris Diaphragm: Closed No. 01-70 Ref. 417-IEC 5324
Radiation Filter or Filtration No. 04-51 Ref. 417-IEC 5381
Light Indicator of Radiation Field No. 04-51 Ref. 417-IEC 5381
Beam Limiting Device: Open No. 04-55 Ref. 417-IEC 5385

Beam Limiting Device: Closed No. 04-56 Ref. 417-IEC 5386
Beam Limiting Device: Closed with Separate Opening of the Shutters No. 04-57 Ref. 417-IEC 5387
Beam Limiting Device with Separate Closing of the Shutters No. 04-58 Ref. 417-IEC 5388
Cassette Size Sensing Device
Device Requiring Proper Disposal, Attch. 4 Ref. 2002/95/CE

Type B Applied Part No. 02-02 Ref. 601-I-IEC (Not applicable for R 915, R 915 S and R 915 S DHHS)
Follow Instructions for Use Ref. ISO 7010-M002 (see the collimator label)
General Warning Sign No. 03-02 Ref. IEC 601-1
Caution: Laser Radiation Ref. 60825-1
This symbol identifies electrostatic sensitive devices.

• Always transport electrostatic sensitive devices (such as PCB) in their static shielding bags or
boxes.
• Always use the ESD protection service kit when handling electrostatic sensitive devices.
• Attach the wristband to your wrist (1) and connect the ground cable of the wristband
to the conductive work surface (2).
• Connect the second ground cable (3) to the conductive work surface (2).
• Attach the crocodile clip to a
reliable ground of the cabinet
or console, where the PCB
has to be installed.
• Place the PCB on the conductive work
surface before installing them.
• Place the PCB on the conductive work
surface for hardware settings or
replacement of components.
• Never remove or disconnect the
wristband before all electrostatic
sensitive devices are installed.
• Never remove or disconnect the
wristband before all removed
electrostatic sensitive devices are
safely packed in their static shielding
bags or boxes.
Fig. 1 ESD protection kit

Safety Signs on the Product

• Do not remove or change safety signs!
• Replace illegible safety signs by genuine spare parts!
• Clean soiled safety signs!
Refer to the labelling drawings of the components to see the positions of the labels.
Safety of Personal Protective Equipment

• The collimator does not contain polluting materials or products with the exception of the lead that composes the
shutters and an inner lining of the collimator cover, if properly disposed of at the end of its life cycle.
• Avoid direct contact with lead especially for prolonged periods.
• Gloves must be worn when handling the disassembled collimator, especially the parts mentioned above.
• Do not use for any other work.
• Disposable gloves may also be worn and can be disposed with normal trash.
Disposal
• Dispose any material, batteries and X-ray equipment in accordance with the requirements of national legislation!
• Do not dispose X-ray equipment together with domestic waste!

• All Ralco’s products conform to RoHS
• All Ralco’s products conform to REACH
Safety Messages Reported Into The Manual
WARNING
This symbol combined with the signal word WARNING indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in death or serous injury.
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of death or serious injury.
CAUTION
This symbol combined with the signal word CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in minor or moderate injury.
If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of minor or moderate injury.
The shown symbols are sometimes replaced by other symbols which indicate the concrete risk:
Material Damage
NOTICE
This symbol combined with the signal word NOTICE indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could
result in damages such as material damage. This damage is not related to personal injury.
Other Messages
Important
This symbol combined with the signal word Important indicates an important advice that points out that certain
guidelines, parameters, conditions or restrictions must be observed.
For any inquires or notifications, please contact us at:

Ralco, srl
Via dei Tigli 13/G
20853 Biassono, (MB) Italia
Telephone: +39 039 2497925
Fax: +39 039 2497799
E-mail: [email protected]

DESCRIPTION
Multilayer, square field, automatic collimation system intended for installation on
stationary X-ray equipment. This device has been designed and manufactured for
skeletal, gastrointestinal, urographic and thoracic investigations.
The square field is defined by 6 pairs of lead faced shutters contained in the collimator body.
Two pairs of shutters are located near the X-ray focus to control the X-ray beam and eliminate
off-focus radiation. Two pairs are located on the entrance window. The other two pairs of
shutters are positioned near the exit window to provide a sharply defined X-ray field. A key-
switch on the rear cover of the collimator allows to select between automatic and manual
modes of operation. A set of rail guides inside the collimator allows the insertion of an ionization
chamber.
A microprocessor circuit controls the stepper motors and provides the step-less adjustment of
the square field dimensions at variable SID.
The field dimensions may be decreased and increased to the desired size by rotating the two
knobs on the collimator front panel.
CHARACTERISTICS
Mounting Plane at 80 mm (3.15") from the focus.
Continuous Film Coverage from Min: 00 x 00 cm to Max: 48 x 48 cm at 100 cm (40") SID.
Maximum Radiation Leakage: 150 kVp - 4 mA
High luminosity provided by a White LED which simulates the X-ray field.
Minimum Inherent Filtration 2 mm aluminium equivalent.
Accessory Guides are used for accessories and additonal filtration.
Retractable Tape mounted on a radiological unit, measures the distance between the
focus and the patient.
Resin Rotating Mounting Flange allows the collimator to rotate, 20mm thickness, 0°
detent, 140mm diameter.
Single Laser for the alignment of the collimator to the receptor (Class 1).
The collimator has been designed for an Ionization Chamber to be included. When the iris
option is installed the device is assembled outside of the collimator.
RSR008 electronic board which controls two motors for Cross/Long shutter movements.
GC-LED-4A timer board for light source supply and operation. The board is CanBus
controlled.
Connecting cable 10m
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Description
Fig. R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS Front Panel with Exterior Dimensions
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS DESCRIPTION

This collimator may have the following optional items; a detailed description is provided in the
chapter OPTIONAL ITEMS.
RO DESCRIPTION
RO 002 Iron mounting flange spacer: 1.5mm thickness
Final quality test report documentation (Light field, luminosity, light to X-ray
RO 063 field correspondence, light field border contrast ratio, x-ray leakage, control of
general functions)
RO 074 External housing in customized color
RO 082 Glass mirror with minimum internal inherent filtration: 1mm Al equivalent
RO 096 Wiring customization
RO 107 Knob color customization
RO 111 Front panel customization
Self-centering top-cover bracket for Siemens X-ray tube only (mounting flange
RO 203
provided by Siemens only)
Aluminum accessory guide rails painted in standard housing color (unless RO

RO 210
074 selected)
RO 240 Focal-spot to skin spacer
RO 242/1 Single laser line to align collimator and detector center: Class 2
Two lasers forming a crosshair to center the patient to the detector: Class 2
RO 242/2
(not available with RO 436)
Fixed near focal shutters (single layer collimation) for use with a mounting
RO 278
plane of 80mm from the X-ray focus
Additional variable filtration - automatic selection. 4 position rotating wheel with

RO 305 selectable filters (clockwise): (1) empty or (2) 0.1mm Cu+1mm Al or (3) 0.2mm
Cu+1mm Al or (4) 2mm Al

RO 305/1 selectable filters (clockwise): (1) empty or (2) 0.1mm Cu or (3) 0.2mm Cu or (4)
0.3mm Cu
External analogic/digital interface in metal housing with 10 meter connecting

RO 308
cable

RO DESCRIPTION
RO 310 Round field collimation for image intensifier
RO 314 Camera assembled internally for patient monitoring: analogic interface
Motorized rotation of collimator: 45° movement (not available with RO 492, RO

RO 320
498 or RO 609)
RO 329 Internal proximity sensor
RO 330 Connecting cable extension
Resin rotating mounting flange: 15mm thickness, +/-0° detent, 140mm

RO 332/A diameter including fixing screws (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO
609)
RO 337 Camera support (camera not included)
Accessory guide rail spacers with support painted in standard housing color
RO 344
(unless RO 074 selected)
RO 356 Shutter position verified by potentiometer: Output signal managed by customer
Resin rotating mounting flange milled to form a square: 20mm thickness, +/-
RO 409 90° detent, 140mm diameter + three iron mounting flange spacers milled to
form a square: 1.5mm thickness (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO
609)
RO 428 Mechanical modification for 7” touchscreen display (not available with RO 436)
Reduction of housing height (from 204mm to 191mm- DAP may not be

RO 436
mounted internally)

RO 441
diameter (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO 609)

RO 442
RO 444 Collimator control protocol: CANopen (CIA 412-2)
Metal rotating mounting flange, 20mm thickness, +/-90° mechanical stop,

RO 445
140mm diameter (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO 609)
RO 452 Asymmetric longitudinal shutters (“stitching” application)
Metal rotating mounting flange: 20mm thickness, +/-90° mechanical stop,

RO 456
136mm diameter (only available with RO 492)

RO DESCRIPTION
RO 470 High precision ball bearing shutter movement
RO 481 Internal rotating square field (not available with RO 310 or RO 344)

RO 489

RO 490
140mm diameter with countersunk mounts (only available with RO 492)
Adjustable top-cover bracket for use with metal mounting flange (mounting
RO 492
flange not included)
RO 495 Camera assembled internally for patient monitoring: IP ethernet interface
Self-centering top-cover bracket with zero position output signal using a

RO 498
microswitch (resin mounting flange not included)

RO 499
diameter, 0° position tolerance +/-3° (only available with RO 498)
RO 502 Camera assembled internally for patient monitoring: USB interface

RO 518 selectable filters (clockwise): (1) empty or (2) 0.1mm Cu+1mm Al or (3) 0.1mm
Cu+0.5mm Al or (4) 0.5mm Cu+1mm Al

RO 530

RO 541
140mm diameter (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO 609)
RO 544 7" touchscreen display (not available with RO 436)
Front silkscreen with six double-safety touch buttons for collimator control and
RO 545
customer remote control movement (only available with RO 544)

RO 552 140mm diameter, fixation plate 4mm, rotation force 1.6kg ± 0.4 / release force
3.5kg ± 0.5 (not available with RO 492, RO 498 or RO 609)
RO 570 Shutter position verified by encoders
RO 575 Iron mounting flange spacer: 1mm thickness

RO DESCRIPTION
RO 587/2 Two lasers forming a crosshair to center the patient to the detector: Class 1

RO 599
RO 603 Shutter blocking screws with warning label for protection during shipment

RO 605
Self-centering top-cover bracket with zero position output signal using a

RO 609
microswitch (resin mounting flange not included)

RO 610
Metal rotating mounting flange: 18mm thickness, +/-90° mechanical stop,

RO 611
140mm diameter, 0° position tolerance +/-3° (only available with RO 609)

RO 619 diameter, 0° position tolerance +/-3° with fixing screws (only available with RO
609)

SPECIFICATIONS
NOTE
SPECIFICATIONS OF THE BASIC VERSION OF THE COLLIMATOR ARE DESCRIBED

HERE BELOW.
POWER SUPPLY
24 V AC/DC - 3 A, 50/60 Hz
Power Supply
Fuse for power supply protection collimator. Not supplied by Ralco. T 3.5 A
Motor Supplied by Collimator Board RSR008
Fuse for Power Supply Protection Motor. Not supplied by Ralco n.a.
Potentiometers/Encoders:
1 turn - 1 Kohm
Square Field
1 turn - 1 Kohm
Round Field
ELECTRONIC SPECIFICATIONS
The software version of the collimator

Software RSR008
boards is documentated by the Final
Control and Testing Form attached to
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Specifications
Software GC-LED-4A
the collimator.
Power Supply, External PCB n.a.
Fuse for External Board n.a.
RADIOLOGICAL SPECIFICATION
Inherent Filtration Al. Equivalent

X-ray beam = 75 kV Min. Al Eq. 2 mm (1 mm on request)
EN 60601-1-3 par. 7.3; 7.4
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS SPECIFICATIONS

RADIOLOGICAL SPECIFICATION
Filtration, Additional
X-ray beam = 75 kV n.a.
EN 60601-1-3 par. 7.5
Limitation of Extra Focal Radiation

Set Focus Distance, SID 100 cm (40") < 150 mm
EN 60601-2-54
Square X-ray Field Selection

Min: 00 x 00 cm
100 cm (40") SID - (± 1% SID)
Max: 48 x 48 cm
EN 60601-2-54
Round X-ray Field Selection

1 m SID - (± 1% SID) n.a.
EN 60601-2-54
Light Field Indicator

Luminosity at 1 m from the focus, field size set at 35x35 cm. > 160 lx
EN 60601-2-54
Light Field Indicator - Contrast

Edge Contrast Setting 35x35 cm at 1 m SID > 4:1
EN 60601-2-54
Light Field Indicator Precision

Light Field/X-ray Field Correspondence < 1% SID
EN 60601-2-54
Accuracy of X-ray field as shown on the front display versus actual

< 2 mm per side
X-ray field dimension.
X-ray Field Indication Precision

Settings on an Index Scale Display: < 1% SID
EN 60601-2-54
SID: (optional)
Precision of Measurement with Retractable Tape < 1% SID
EN 60601-2-54
Maximum Radiation Leakage

Measured at 100 cm with X-ray Beam = 150 kVp - 4 mA < 40 mRh
EN 60601-1-3

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
Operation Environment
10°- 40°C
Ambient Temperature
10%- 75%
Relative Humidity
700 - 1060 hPa
Atmospheric Pressure
Storage
-40° - +70°C
Temperature
10% - 95%
Humidity
500 - 1060 hPa
Atmospheric Pressure
Weight* 11 Kg
* The weight may vary according to the optional items mounted to the collimator.
L: 282 mm
Dimensions W: 244 mm
H: 216 mm
Static Load: 70 N (about 7.1 Kg)

Maximum Load for Accessory Rails and Dimensions for Accessory
Dynamic load: 15 N (approx. 1.5 Kgm)
Distance between Rail Slots 177 mm (+/- 0.5 mm)**
**
ATTENTION:
THE DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO RAILS VARIES AND DEPENDS ON THE COLLIMATOR MODEL.
PRIOR TO INSERTING ACCESSORIES IN THE RAILS MAKE SURE THAT THE DIMENSIONS OF THE
ACCESSORY MATCHES WITH THE DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO RAILS SLOTS (TOLERANCE MAX.
± 0,5 MM).
THE INCORRECT DIMENSION CAN LEAD TO DANGEROUS SITUATIONS AND/OR TO THE ACCESSORY
FALLING.
SEE THE CHAPTER OPTIONAL ITEMS IF THE RAILS DIFFER FROM THE STANDARD ONES.

INSTALLATION
WARNINGS
THE COLLIMATOR MUST BE INSTALLED TO THE X-RAY TUBE THROUGH A MOUNTING

FLANGE. RALCO PROVIDES VARIOUS FLANGE OPTIONS WHICH MAY NOT BE INTER-
CHANGEABLE. ONLY FLANGES PROVIDED WITH THE COLLIMATOR MAY BE UTILIZED.
THE END-USER MAY INSTALL THEIR OWN FLANGE, HOWEVER RALCO CANNOT GUARANTEE
COMPATIBILITY. ANY PREEXISTING FLANGE ON THE END-USER SYSTEM MUST NOT
BE USED.
WHEN A FLANGE IS PROVIDED WITH THE COLLIMATOR BEARING A MATCHING SERIAL

NUMBER, ENSURE THEY ALWAYS REMAIN COUPLED. IT IS MANDATORY THEY REMAIN
TOGETHER AND THE CORRECT FLANGE PART NUMBER IS USED.
THE CONTENTS OF THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW SHOULD BE STRICTLY ADHERED TO.

RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR ANY PROPERTY DAMAGE OR RESULTING HARM IF NON-
RALCO COMPONENTS OR NON-COMPATIBLE RALCO COMPONENTS ARE USED DURING
THE INSTALLATION PROCESS.
TUBE COMPATIBILITY
1. Using the dimensions in Fig. Tube Compatibility below, ensure the near port shutters of
the collimator are placed in the X-Ray tube port without interference.
• Assembly values (X-Ray tube housing and collimator) must comply with a minimum
value of inherent filtration and a maximum value of radiation leakage.
2. The distance between the X-Ray tube focus and the flange mounting plane (collimator
upper plate) must be: 80 mm (3.15"), tolerance +/- 1 mm (0.04 “).
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Installation
Fig. Tube Compatibility
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INSTALLATION

3. Carefully remove the collimator and the

mounting flange from their packaging.
4. Use the X-Ray tube housing datasheet to
determine the distance (A) from the focal spot
to the X-Ray tube port, see Fig. Collimator
Installation.
5. Subtract the resulting distance from the
source flange distance (B) and determine the
number of spacers (1.5 mm) which, combined
with the thickness of the mounting flange, will
make up the difference (C). Allowable toler-
ance is 1 mm. (0.04"), see Fig. Collimator
Installation.
6. Once the mounting plane distance has been
confirmed, continue with the mounting flange
installation to the X-Ray tube.
*The flange fixing screws and the spacers of the

previous flange may be reused if the flange
thickness is the same.*
7.
Fig. Collimator Installation
MOUNTING THE FLANGE TO THE X-RAY TUBE
NOTE
THE FOLLOWING MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS ARE ONLY APPLICABLE FOR COMPATIBLE

FLANGES. IF YOU ARE UNSURE THE MOUNTING FLANGE YOUR COLLIMATOR IS
EQUIPPED WITH IS COMPATIBLE, PLEASE CONSULT YOUR PERSONALIZATION PAGE
PROVIDED WITH THIS MANUAL TO LOCATE THE FLANGE PART NUMBER (RO REFER-
ENCE). FOLLOW THE MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS SET FORTH UNDER THE SPECIFIC
RO REFERENCE IN THIS MANUAL.
WARNING
FLANGES MAY BE PROVIDED BY RALCO OR BY THE SYSTEM MANUFACTURER. FLANGES

MAY NOT BE INTERCHANGEABLE. ONLY THE FLANGE PROVIDED WITH THE COLLIMATOR
BEING INSTALLED WITH A SPECIFIC PART CODE MAY BE UTILIZED. ANY PRE-EXISTING
FLANGES MAY NOT TO BE USED. IF THERE ARE ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING
COMPATIBILITY, PLEASE CONTACT RALCO.

CAUTION
RALCO CANNOT GUARANTEE COMPLIANCE WITH RADIATION STANDARDS CONCERNING

SAFETY IF THIS CONTROL HAS BEEN OMITTED.
1. Place the flange on the X-Ray tube port,

see Fig. Flange Installation.
2. Mount the mounting flange and spacers
(optional) to the X-Ray tube port using 4
screws.**
**Please ensure no conflicting information

nor dangerous conditions exist due to
adhering to these instructions or those
provided by the X-Ray tube manufacturer.
When in doubt please contact X-ray tube
manufacturer and/or Ralco.
Fig. Flange Installation

*illustrative purpose only
Fig. Mounting Flange

CAUTION
THE FLANGE MUST BE PLACED WITH THE LETTER "F" FACING TOWARD THE
X-RAY TUBE PORT. INCORRECT POSITION MAY CAUSE THE COLLIMATOR AND
FLANGE TO MALFUNCTION.
ENSURE THE SCREW HEAD IS INDEED CORRECT FOR THE FLANGE SELECTED.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE END-USER TO ENSURE ALL SAFETY MEASURES
ARE IMPLEMENTED TO ENSURE THE SCREWS ARE OPTIMALLY TIGHTENED INCLUDING
THE USE OF APPROPRIATE LOCKTITE.
TIGHTEN THE 4 SCREWS TO THE X-RAY TUBE HEAD SECURELY, STRICTLY ACCORDING
TO THE INSTRUCTIONS OF THE X-RAY TUBE MANUFACTURER. DO NOT EXCEED
0.45 NM OF FORCE.
ALIGNMENT OF X-RAY TUBE FOCUS AND COLLIMATOR

Ralco guarantees the correct collimator functionality, format compliance and light/X-Ray field
alignment only if the mounting flange and the collimator have been installed exactly in the
centre of the X-Ray beam.
All Ralco collimators are aligned on our test bench utilizing specific references/values for our
X-Ray tube focus, detector and Source to Image Detector Distance (SID). The customer must
know and verify all known variables which may influence the X-Ray tube focus and collimator
alignment. These may include, the X-Ray tube focus position tolerance, distance from X-Ray
tube focus to collimator mounting plane, or the SID.
Alignment Device
This device is used to ensure the collimator
mounting flange is correctly aligned to the X-ray
beam. The X-ray tube manufacturer provides a
tolerance for the placement of X-ray tube focus.
Ralco recommends to use the Focal Alignment

Device (jig) to ensure the correct flange alignment
with the centre of the X-Ray beam, see Fig. Focal
Alignment Device. By making an exposure, it is
possible to verify the perpendicularity and
concentricity using fixed references on the X-Ray
image.
Once the mounting flange is aligned the collimator
light/X-ray field should also be aligned (within
specific tolerances).
Please consult the technical specifications of your X- A - X-Ray Tube, B - Focal Adjustment Device
Ray tube to find the maximum tolerance for the C - Mounting Flange, D - Screw, E - Washer
Fig. Focal Alignment Device

position of the focus. Should the use of an alignment device not be possible, Ralco collimators
allow for the regulation of the light field.
Mounting the Collimator to the Flange
NOTE
THE MOUNTING FLANGE PROVIDED (IF PURCHASED) WITH THE COLLIMATOR IS

SUBJECTED TO TESTING PURSUANT TO ALL APPLICABLE STANDARDS.
MOUNTING BRACKET TABS CONFORM TO EN60601.
WARNINGS
PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE STANDARDS, RALCO HAS TESTED THE COLLIMATOR

AND FLANGE APPLYING STATIC LOADS. RALCO IS NOT IN A POSITION TO KNOW
THE DYNAMIC FORCES OF ALL END-USER SYSTEMS. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY
OF THE END-USER TO ENSURE DYNAMIC FORCES OF THE SYSTEM DO NOT CREATE
A DANGEROUS CONDITION.
IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE SYSTEM MANUFACTURER TO ENSURE AND

MITIGATE ANY DANGEROUS CONDITIONS WHICH MAY OCCUR DUE TO THE DYNAMIC
FORCES CREATED BY THE SYSTEM. THE END-USER MUST PERFORM A SYSTEMATIC
AND STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS DURING THE INSTALLATION AND USUAL MAINTENANCE.
SHOULD ANY DAMAGE TO THE COLLIMATOR OR FLANGE OCCUR A RISK ANALYSIS

AND DAMAGE ASSESSMENT NEEDS TO BE CONDUCTED IMMEDIATELY. CONTACT
RALCO IMMEDIATELY SHOULD THIS OCCUR. RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR RESULTING
PROPERTY DAMAGE AND/OR HARM DUE TO AN UNREPORTED INCIDENT.
RALCO HAS DESIGNED AND TESTED THE COLLIMATOR FOR A LIFETIME OF 10

YEARS. AFTER THIS TIME PERIOD, IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE END-USER
TO ENSURE THE PROPER FUNCTIONING OF THE COLLIMATOR AND FLANGE. LIABILITY
FOR ANY DANGEROUS CONDITIONS WHICH MAY BE PRESENT AFTER THE 10YEAR
LIFETIME OF THE COLLIMATOR AND FLANGE RESTS WITH THE END-USER.
TO ENSURE THE SAFETY OF THE COLLIMATOR AND FLANGE AFTER 10 YEARS

OF USE, RALCO HAS INSTITUTED A PROGRAM TO ASSESS THE SAFETY OF THE
COLLIMATOR AND FLANGE. AFTER APPLYING A CHECK LIST OF QUALITY CONTROLS
AND REFURBISHMENT ACTIVITIES (AT END-USER EXPENSE), RALCO MAY CERTIFY
THE COLLIMATOR AND FLANGE FOR ADDITIONAL YEARS OF USE.

The mounting bracket has 2 tabs with springs in positions 2 and 4, while the 2 tabs in position
1 and 3 cover the surface of the outer ring of the flange, see Fig. Mounting Bracket.
1. Prepare the collimator to be installed by

unscrewing the 4 hexagonal socket
screws until the four tabs are completely
withdrawn form the collimator top
mounting plane, see Fig. 4 Mounting
Screws.
2. If installing a manual collimator, adjust
the collimator shutters to the fully open
position using both knobs.
CAUTION
WHEN UNSCREWING THE HEXAG-

ONAL SOCKET SCREW WHICH
CONTROL THE TABS, DO NOT USE
FORCE EXCEEDING 0,45 NM.
UNSCREW WITH CARE SO AS NOT
TO DAMAGE THE HEXAGONAL
Fig. Collimator Mounting Bracket
SCREW HEAD AND TABS.
3. With the tabs fully retracted, tabs in position

1 and 3 which overlap the outer ring must be
tightening equally up to the end stroke with
0.45 Nm torque (at least 7 turns). See Fig.
Mounting Bracket.
4. With the tabs fully retracted, the tabs in posi-
tion 2 and 4 have an integrated adjustable
spring and can be tightened in two different
ways allowing the flange to be fixed or to
rotate, see Fig. Mounting Bracket.
FIXED (NO ROTATION)

With the tabs fully retracted, tighten all tabs up
to the end stroke with 0.45Nm torque at least 7
turns (if you are not able to respect the turns
something is incorrect, repeat above
instructions, if issues persist, please contact
Ralco). Fig. Mounting Bracket

Fig. Mounting Bracket (Fixed)
WITH ROTATION
With the tabs fully retracted, tighten tabs in the following sequence (if you are not able to
respect the turns something is incorrect, repeat above instructions, if issues persist, please
contact Ralco):
• Tabs 1 and 3 - minimum of 7 turns
• Tabs 2 and 4 – exactly 5 ½ turns.
Fig. Mounting Bracket (Rotating)
The collimator tabs glide on the flange outer ring and the collimator rotates towards the X- Ray
tube axis. If, however:
• The release force from the position 0° and the collimator rotation in too low, the two tabs of
the tab 2 and 4 need to be tighten ½ turn.
• The release force from the position 0° and the collimator rotation is too high, the two tabs of
the tab 2 and 4 need to be loosened ½ turn.

VERIFICATION OF CORRECT INSTALLATION
WARNING
IT IS THE DUTY OF THE INSTALLER TO ENSURE NO RISK OF THE COLLIMATOR

FALLING EXISTS. ENS URE THE FOLLOWING, AS IN EACH SCENARIO BELOW SERIOUS
RISK OF INJURY AND/OR PROPERTY DAMAGE MAY EXIST DUE TO NON-ADHERENCE.
1. The 4 tabs should overlap the flange outer ring, see Fig. Correct Overlap.
2. Ensure the mounting flange is flat against the collimator mounting plane, see Fig. Correct
Overlap.
3. Ensure the 4 tabs are not in contact with only the mounting flange edge, see Fig. Incorrect
Overlap.
4. Once the collimator is mounted, if not already, return the collimator/tube head to the
intended use position. Rotate and/or gently pull the collimator to ensure correct coupling.
5. If the collimator is loose, something is incorrect. Repeat above mounting instructions, and if
issues persist, please contact Ralco.
Fig. Correct Overlap Fig. Incorrect Overlap

Ionization Chamber Mounting

This collimator is designed for an ionization chamber with an inter axis of 177.5 mm.
• Remove the front panel, see Chapter -

COVER REMOVAL.

• Disconnect the connector.
• Turn the collimator over and unscrew the

four screws.
• Remove the tape stop by lifting it off with a

screw driver. Gently ease the tape into its
container within the collimator.
• Insert the ionization chamber between the

two rails and mount lower part of the
cover.
• Connect the DAP to board RSR008 and

re-mount the cover in reverse order.
• Set up the SW3 dip-switch according to
the DAP model.

• IBA 120-131 model: 1 and 3 dip-switch are ON (SW3)


ELECTRICAL CONNECTION
NOTE
THE WIRING DIAGRAM INCLUDED IN THIS DOCUMENT REFERS TO THE STANDARD

PRODUCT. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CUSTOMER WHO HAS REQUESTED
AN ELECTRIC CUSTOMIZATION, TO ENSURE THAT AN ELECTRIC DIAGRAM RELATING
TO THE CUSTOMIZATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED WITH THE DOCUMENTATION.
THE DEVICE IS PROJECTED TO OPERATE WITH A PERMANENT POWER SUPPLY

PRESENT SO THE PROCEDURE OF SWITCHING OFF THE COLLIMATOR IS NOT FORESEEN.
NO RISK OR DEVICE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE MACHINE IS ACCIDENTLY SWITCHED
OFF.
WARNING
THE DEVICE MUST BE EXCLUSIVELY CONNECTED TO POWER NETWORK, WITH

EARTH PROTECTION, IN ORDER TO AVOID A RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
SUPPLY AND SIGNALS TO THE COLLIMATOR MUST BE TO 2007/47/CE STANDARDS.

DEVICES THAT SUPPLY THE COLLIMATOR MUST THEREFORE FEATURE DOUBLE
OR REINFORCED INSULATION AS PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL STANDARD ON ELEC-
TROMEDICAL EQUIPMENT CEI62-5 +A2 (EN 60601-1).
THE DEVICE IS ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE, CONSEQUENTLY ALL THE RELATING
SAFETY STANDARDS MUST BE COMPLIED WITH.
COLLIMATOR MUST BE SUPPLIED AS SPECIFIED, SEE CHAPTER SPECIFICATIONS.

THE SUPPLY MUST COME FROM A SEPARATE SOURCE FROM THE POWER NETWORK
THROUGH DOUBLE INSULATION OR REINFORCED INSULATION AND WITH LIMITED
CURRENT. TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS MUST CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
OF STANDARD IEC 60601-1.
CABLES AND TERMINALS USED FOR THE INTERNAL CONNECTION OF THE COLLIMATOR
MUST BE SUITABLE FOR OPERATION AT TEMPERATURES OF 80°C AND COLLIMATOR
CURRENT ABSORPTION.
TO ENSURE THE SAFE USE OF THE COLLIMATOR, IT IS MANDATORY TO SECURELY

AND FIRMLY INSERT THE POWER SUPPLY/DATA CABLE BETWEEN THE COLLIMATOR
AND RADIOLOGICAL SYSTEM. IT IS ALSO MANDATORY THAT THE POWER SUPPLY/
DATA CABLE IS CORRECTLY SECURED TO THE STRAIN RELIEF. IF THE STRAIN
RELIEF IS MISSING IT IS MANDATORY ONE BE CORRECTLY AND SECURELY INSTALLED.
RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN THE EVENT OF MISSING OR INCORRECT
CABLE INSTALLATION.

Power Supply Connection

• Remove the part of cover to access the terminal, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL.
• Connect supply cables to the relative collimator terminals and earth on the screw marked
with the relating symbol: . Use the protective earth cable with green/yellow insula-
tion.
• In collimators with a free cable stop, remove the cable stop, connect the supply cables,
remount and then secure the cable stop.
• Remount the cover.
WARNINGS
INCORRECT POWER SUPPLY COULD DAMAGE THE ELECTRONIC BOARDS AND/OR

THE LIGHT SOURCE.
SUPPLY MAY BE EITHER IN ALTERNATE OR DIRECT CURRENT.
MAKE CERTAIN THAT POLARITY IS RESPECTED.

Wiring Diagram

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Installation Model R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS

Cable

OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS
This collimator is intended to be used for Radiography. It can be operated in automatic mode
or manual mode. The following section describes generally how each mode works. This section
also describes how to operate the light field.
The three different colored LEDs (red, green, and yellow) tell the user in what mode the
collimator is functioning and whether any errors/dangerous operating conditions are present.
• The SID in use is too short for the cassette in use; max.
opening of shutters: 43x43 cm at 90 cm - i.e. the shutters are at
Red LED
end run but the motors are still running to attain a correct
Exposure HOLD
position.
• Motors are moving to their correct position.
Increase SID • The collimator will automatically adjust the field, etc.
Green LED • The system is ready.
READY • All pre-set functions are allowed.
• X-ray field not enabled.
• The system has no SID signal.
Yellow LED • SID signal below or over the minimum and maximum set value.
MANUAL • Collimator inclination exceeds +/-3°.
• Key switch (back of collimator) is turned to the Manual Mode.
• Manual Mode selected.
Prior to operating the collimator, check the settings related to correct X-ray beam functions.
NOTE
SHUTTERS CANNOT OPEN TO COVER A FIELD LARGER THAN THE SET FIELD.
IF THE SYSTEM IS IN THE MANUAL MODE - LATERAL POSITION (+/- 90°), THE
DISPLAY WITH READ THE LAST SID ENTERED AND THE LAST FIELD SIZE.
IF THE SYSTEM IS IN A VERTICAL POSITION, THE DISPLAY WITH PROVIDE SHUTTER
POSITION INDICATIONS.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Operation Instructions
RADIOGRAPHY
Automatic Square-Field Operation Mode (Long and Cross Shutters)
Collimator in the Vertical Position
• The collimator must be vertical, ± 3°.
• The collimator automatically sets to cassette dimension.
• The display indicates the SID selected, type of filter selected if the collimator assembles fil-
ters, Long and Cross (and iris dimensions, if the collimator assembles the round field fea-
ture).
• The green LED on the front panel serves to indicate that the unit is read.
The operator can:

• Turn the field light ON by activating the related push-button on the front panel or via
the external control.
• Reduce the set field using the knobs or push-buttons on the front panel or via
CanBus.
• The field may be resized within the limits of the field-size set automatically.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS

• If the shutters close completely, the output contact signalling "shutter closed" will be
activated.
• If present, vary additional filtration by selecting the filters by activating the related
push-button on the collimator front panel or via CanBus.
• Control from the collimator provides a sequential selection. CanBus control provides
sequential or random filter selection.
• Vary SID selected keeping the field size automatically constant.
Collimator in the Lateral Position
• The collimator must be turned left toward the lateral Bucky: -90° left, +90° right; ± 3°.
• One of the 5 SID lateral switch contacts must be closed.
• Left or right cassette inserted.
The collimator automatically sets the cassette dimensions.
• The key in the vertical position.
The operator can:

• Turn the light field light ON by activating the related push-button or via CanBus.
• Vary the set field size.
• Vary SID in use (selecting one of the 5 fixed SIDs) and keep the set field size
automatically constant.
Manual Mode
The collimator is in the manual mode if:
• The collimator is inclined at an angle exceeding 3° and less than 87°.
• Manual control is selected.
• The cassette-IN micro switch is open.
• The Bucky provides no information regarding cassette format.
• No SID signal is present.
When the system is in the Manual Mode, the yellow LED on the front panel is lit and the output
contact is activated.
The x-ray contact is always closed.
The operator can:

• Turn the light field ON by pressing the related button on the front panel.
• Reduce field directly with the knobs or push-buttons related to shutter opening.
• Check on opening with the light field.
• Increase the set field with the knobs or the shutter-related knobs or push-buttons.The
field may be opened to the maximum mechanical opening or, if CanBus controlled, to
the setting fixed during the installation of the system.
• Check the opening with the light field or display reading.
• Vary the setting of the SID in use using push-buttons + and - on the front panel.
Manual Mode - Key Set
The system is set to the Manual mode if the key switch on the
rear of the collimator is turned to OFF.
• When the system is in the Manual Mode, the yellow LED on
the front panel is lit and the output contact is activated.
• Display indicates the last cassette format memorised, SID
and filter value.

• The X-ray contact is always closed.
The operator can:

• Turn the light field ON by pressing the related button on the front panel.
• Change filter position.
• Reduce the set field size directly with the knobs; the push-buttons are not enabled.
Exposure Hold Mode (Red Light)

The systems sets to EXPOSURE HOLD:
• In cases of incorrect operation conditions.
• When the system is in the automatic mode and the shutter motors are operating to reach
the selected position.
• If the system fails to reach the selected position.
• The LED is lit and the output contact is activated.
• The exposure contact is open.
Inclinometer HOLD Mode

• The control to exclude the inclinometer deactivates the signals from the device for angula-
tion detection. Consequently, the system could remain in the automatic mode even though
it might not be in a vertical position. This forces the collimator to operate in a vertical posi-
tion.
• The deactivation of this control causes the system not to calculate the signal from the
angulation device on the PCB located within the collimator.
Light Field Operation
WARNING
PROLONGED LIGHTING WITHOUT ALLOWING THE LAMP TO COOL CAUSES THE

COLLIMATOR TO OVERHEAT IN THE AREA NEAR THE LAMP.
FOR EMERGENCIES: MAXIMUM LIMIT ADVISED IS 5 SUCCESSIVE LAMP OPERATIONS.
ALLOW THE COLLIMATOR TO COOL (ABOUT 10 MIN.). THE OPERATOR MUST AVOID
OVERHEATING THE COLLIMATOR AND CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO SCORCH

HIMSELF OR THE PATIENT.
The collimator is normally operated by activating the push-button on the front panel to switch
the light field ON.
The collimator has been designed to operate as follows:
• Supply constantly connected during operation of the equipment.
• Lamp ON time: ON time is pre-set in factory to 30s (tol. 20%).
• A normal lamp ON / OFF cycle is established at 2 sequences followed by 4 minutes to
allow for cooling (i.e. 1 minute ON / 4 minutes OFF).
• The field is set automatically by external electronics. For field reduction use the knobs on
the front panel and check the dimension on the display or using the light field.
• The ability to make an exposure is controlled by the electronics that control the collimator.
This acts as a fail safe to block any exposure if there is any problem with the collimator.

CALIBRATION
WARNINGS
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES REQUIRE THAT X-RADIATION BE PRODUCED. TAKE

ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS TO MAKE CERTAIN THAT NO PART OF THE HUMAN BODY
IS EXPOSED TO X-RADIATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT.
CENTERING X-RAY BEAM WITH COLLIMATOR LIGHT

• Select large focus, 60 kV and 5 mAs or equivalent for digital receptor.
• Place a loaded cassette 24 x 30 cm (9.5”x 12”) on the table top and prepare exposure.
• Set SID = 100 cm (40") by using a ruler.
NOTE
IF THE DISTANCE OF 100 CM (40") SID CANNOT BE DETERMINED, USE THE

SID VALUE CLOSEST TO 100 CM (40") AND CALCULATE THE MEASUREMENT
TOLERANCES AS THE APPROPRIATE PERCENTAGES OF THE DISTANCE.
IF THE X-RAY BEAM CANNOT BE POSITIONED VERTICALLY USE CLAMPS, MASKING

TAPE, OR OTHER MATERIAL AS REQUIRED TO POSITION THE X-RAY TUBE AND
IMAGE RECEPTOR. THE X-RAY TUBE AND THE IMAGE RECEPTOR MUST BE SET
OUT AT THE SPECIFIED SID DISTANCE PERPENDICULARLY TO THE X-RAY TUBE
AS DESCRIBED IN THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
NOTE
FIGURE CHECK LIGHT FIELD/X-RAY FIELD

SHOWS AN EXAMPLE WITH FILM CASSETTE.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Calibration
THE SAME PRINCIPLE CAN BE USED FOR

A DIGITAL SYSTEM.
• Set field to 24 x 30 cm.

• Centre the X-ray tube on the cassette.
• Switch ON the light and place four metal
strips (c) on the light field edges (a).
• Place a washer (d) on the right hand-top of Light field (a)
the light field. X-Ray field (b)
• Make an exposure. Fig: Check Light Field/X-ray Field

• Develop the film or print exposure scale 1:1.
• Measure the differences L1,L2 W1 and W2
between the outer edge of each copper strips image and the corresponding edge of
the X-ray Field (b).
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS CALIBRATION

• For required values is referred to the System Reference Manual. However, the values L1 +
L2 and W1 + W2 shall NEVER exceed 2 cm (representing 2% of the SID).
• Note the measured values in Chart below.
• Repeat preceding steps with small focus selected.
SID = 100 cm (40")

2.0% x 100 cm (40") =
LARGE L1+L2 =..........+..........=.......... = ≤ 2.0% SID

FOCUS W1+W2 =..........+..........=.......... = ≤ 2.0% SID
SMALL L1+L2 =..........+..........=.......... = ≤ 2.0% SID

FOCUS W1+W2 =..........+..........=.......... = ≤ 2.0% SID
CAUTION
THE HEEL EFFECT WILL CAUSE THE FIELD TOWARD THE CATHODE TO BE SLIGHTLY
LESS SHARP THAN ON THE OTHER THREE SIDES. THIS IS NORMAL AND CANNOT
BE CORRECTED BY ADJUSTMENT. IN ADDITION, AN X-RAY TUBE OF 12° OR LESS
TARGET ANGLE WILL PRODUCE AN ASYMMETRICALLY SHAPED FIELD WHEN A LARGE
FIELD SIZE IS USED AT SHORT SID, BECAUSE OF ANODE CUT-OFF EFFECT. THIS
IS NORMAL AND MAY NOT BE CORRECTED BY ADJUSTMENT.
LIGHT FIELD TO X-RAY FIELD ALIGNMENT

Misalignment of the light field/ X-ray field in either the X (cross table) or Y (long table) direction
must not exceed 2% of the SID. In this case, it would be less than 20 mm (0.80"). If the test film
shows that the light field (shadows of the copper strips) matches the X-ray field (shadow of the
collimator shutters) to within the diameter of one strips and, if the diameter is less than 20 mm
(0.80"), then alignment complies with the regulations.
Greater precision than this is possible. Recommended maximum deviation is one fourth. It is
important the greatest degree of congruency possible is achieved.
If misalignment is detected in both X and Y directions, check the spacing from the focal spot to
the collimator mounting surface is 80 mm (3.15") +/- 1 mm. If spacing needs to be adjusted,
repeat the test film exposure after the adjustment.
If the source flange distance (SFD) is correct, but adjustment is still necessary proceed as
follows:
• Place the test film on the face of the cassette over the white paper or repeat exposure on
the flat panel.
• Place the cassette in the position originally marked.
• Check the correct position of the film or the X-ray field on the flat panel by the shadows
cast by the copper strips.
• Using the images of the collimator shutters as the references for the shape and size of the
X-ray field, adjust the light field to match.
• If adjustment is necessary, adjust the travel of the light source. All procedures can be found
in LIGHT FIELD ADJUSTMENTS in this chapter.

VERTICAL ALIGNMENT
• Remove the part of the cover necessary to access the screws, see Chapter - COVER
REMOVAL.
• If adjustment is required loosen the two screws C holding the light support.
• If the light-field is smaller than the X-ray field, move away the light source by adjusting
screw D.
• If the light-field is bigger than the X-ray field, move the light source closer by adjusting
screws D.
• Tighten the two screws C. See Fig. Light Field Adjustment
Longitudinal Alignment (Long)
WARNING
DO NOT TOUCH THE DISSIPATER WITH YOUR HANDS; IT COULD BE HOT AND
CAUSE SEVERE BURNS.
• Remove part of the cover, see Chapter - COVER REMOVAL.

• If the light-field needs to be moved laterally, loosen (not remove) the fixing screws A.
• Use screw B to adjust transversely.
• When calibration is terminated, lock the screws A. See Fig. Light Field Adjustment
Fig. Light Field Adjustment

Transversal Calibration (CROSS)

If the light-field needs calibration, the mirror needs to be adjusted as follows:
• Remove the part of the cover necessary to access the screws, see Chapter - COVER
REMOVAL.
• Loosen the mirror fixing screw A (not remove) and rotate the cam B to adjust the position of
the mirror, see Fig. Transversal Calibration (CROSS).
• Once you have regulated the mirror tighten the screw A and remount the cover, see Chap-
ter - COVER REMOVAL.

Fig. Transversal Calibration (CROSS)


ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
This section describes the collimator control system which includes:
• RSR008 - Electronic board which controls two motors for Cross/Long shutter movements
and one motor for filter positioning.
• GC-LED-4A - Timer board for light source supply and operation. The board is CanBus con-
trolled.
RSR008 BOARD
Characteristics
• CanBus Interface 500 Kbit/s 11 bit.
• White LED output.
• Ionization chamber output 24 V DC.
• Cooling fan output 24 V DC.
• Supply 24 V AC/DC.
• Temperature sensor input.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Electronic System
• Manual control input.

• Selection of fixed times (4 light times, 4 ramp times).
• Customizable board via serial interface (TTL).
• CanBus Connector.
• Hardware streamlining to improve measurement of mains frequencies.
• Compatible with 50/60 Hz frequencies with frequency detection.
J1 - Supply 1. 24 V AC/DC
2. Earth
3. Earth
4. 24 V AC/DC
5. Lamp
6. Lamp
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS ELECTRONIC SYSTEM

J2 - Filter Photocell 1. +LED Emitter

2. In Photosensor Filter
3. -LED Emitter
4. Gnd Photosensor
J3 - Cross & Proximity Photocell 1. +LED Emitter Cross

2. n.u. (+LED)
3. In Photosensor Cross
4. In Proximity Signal
5. -LED Emitter
6. n.u. (Gnd)
7. Gnd Photosensor Cross
8. n.u. (Gnd)
J4 - Long Photocell 1. +LED Emitter Long

2. n.u. (+LED)
3. In Photosensor Long
4. n.u. (In sensor)
5. -LED Emitter
6. n.u. (Gnd)
7. Gnd Photosensor Long
8. n.u. (Gnd)
J5 - Filter and Lamp Switch 1. In Filter Switch

2. Gnd Filter Switch
3. In Lamp Switch
4. Gnd Filter Switch
J6 - Electronic Measuring Device 1. Gnd

2. +5 V
4. RX
6. TX
J7 - Cross Motor 1. OUTB-

2. OUTB+
3. OUTA-
4. OUTA+
J8 - Filter Motor 1. OUTB-

2. OUTB+
3. OUTA-
4. OUTA+

J9 - Long Motor 1. OUTB-

2. OUTB+
3. OUTA-
4. OUTA+
J10 - Camera Supply 1. +12 V DC

2. Gnd
J11 - Programming Connector 1. +5 V DC

2. Busy
3. SCLK
4. RXD
5. CE
6. EPM
7. Gnd
8. Reset
9. CNVSS
10. TXD
J12 - Cross Potentiometer 1. +5 V DC (white)

2. Cursor (red)
3. Gnd (blue)
4. Gnd
J13 - Proximity Supply & Key In- 1. +24 V DC Proximity

put 2. Gnd Proximity
3. Key Input
4. Gnd Key
J14 - Long Potentiometer 1. +5 V DC (white)

2. Gnd (blue)
3. n.u. Laser Out +5 V
4. Gnd
5. Cursor (red)
6. Gnd
7. Out Fan +24 V
8. Gnd

J15 - CanBus Connector 1. +5 V DC

2. +5 V DC
3. CANL
4. CANL
5. CANH
6. CANH
7. Gnd
8. Gnd
J17 - External CanBus Supply 1. +8/30 V DC Can

2. Gnd Can
J18,J19 - RJ45 Connectors for 1. CANH

DAP 2. CANL
3. Gnd
4. Dip-Switch 1
5. Dip-Switch 2
6. Dip-Switch 3
7. Dip-Switch 4
8. +24 V DC
Jumper JP16 - CanBus termination

OFF: CanBus not terminated
ON: CanBus terminated with resistor 120 Ohm
GC-LED-4A
Fig. Timer Board Layout

CONNECTORS
1. 24 V AC/DC or 12 V DC
2. 24 V AC/DC or 12 V DC
3. +5 V Fan
4. GND Fan
J2 - SUPPLY AND OUTPUTS
5. +5 V Laser
6. GND Laser
7. + external light push-button
8. GND external light push-button
1. + GC-LED-4A positive output
J1 - LED OUTPUT
2. - GND GC-LED-4A
1. Vpp
2. +5 V
J3 - PROGRAMMING 3. GND
CONNECTORS 4. PGD
5. PGC
6. NC
1. + External LED
2. - External LED
J4 - HOME SENSOR INPUT + 3. - Photosensor LED Cathode
EXTERNAL LED 4. + Photosensor LED Anode
5. Input signal (Photosensor output collector)
6. GND (Photosensor output emitter)
1. NTC LED input
J5 - PUSH BUTTON INPUT + NTC 2. NTC LED input
EXTERNAL LED 3. Laser input, pin 1
4. Laser input, pin 2
1. +5 V
J6 - OPEN-COLLECTOR OUTPUT
1. GND
J7 - OPEN-COLLECTOR (ABNORMAL 1. +
OPERATION MANAGEMENT) 2. -
J8 - J9 - ENCODER
(By connecting an opto-switch it is 1. +LED
possible to switch ON the light when 2. IN
the shutter move) 3. GND
**The encoder reading is available 4. GND
for s.w. 2.00 and 5.00
Jumpers OFF: without jumper

ON: with jumper
JP1, JP2 - ALTERNATE/DIRECT OFF: alternate power supply

POWER SUPPLY ON: direct power supply (pay attention to polarity)
JP5 - LED POWER SUPPLY UP TO 6.2 OFF: LED power supply is adjustable through trimmer to max. 4.8 A
A (STANDARD SETTING 4 A) ON: LED power supply is adjustable through trimmer to max. 6.2 A

JP14 - ADDITIONAL RESISTANCE OFF: standard input

ON: used to power a retro-reflective photocell
JP8, JP9, JP10, JP11, JP12, JP13 - Operation mode selection

OFF: Standard
ON: the timer operates in the time renew mode. When the button is
JP8 - TIME RENEW MODE pressed the time is renewed without the LED OFF (if the LED is already
ON, continues to stay ON but with renewed time). The same is
applicable for the laser if is independent.
OFF: Standard
JP9 - LASER CONTROLLED
ON: When the button, placed on J5, is pressed the laser switches ON
INDEPENDENTLY
independently from the light.
OFF, OFF: 30 seconds

JP11, JP10* - TIME MANAGEMENT ON, OFF: 45 seconds
* Only in mode 4.00 JP10 takes the function of OFF, ON: 60 seconds
exclusion of auto-turning off LED (designed for
ON, ON: power supply (maximum light ON time is 15 min. for safety
temperature)
JP10 - AUTO-SHUTDOWN EXCLUSION reasons).
JP10 - LED auto shutdown exclusion, available in s.w. 4.00 only
OFF, OFF: s.w.2.00 (standard) - it is possible to use the encoder

management to switch ON/OFF the laser and LED
ON, OFF: s.w.3.01 - power supply without any safety and shutdown
time.
OFF, ON: s.w.5.00 with the LED off, pressing the button only turns on
the LED and the fan.
If the button is pressed again within 5 seconds, the laser also lights up.
Pushing the button after the first 5 seconds, everything will switch off
The LED and eventually the laser switch off anyway when the time set
with the trimmer has set
JP12, JP13 - SOFTWARE CONFIGU- (in this mode it is possible to use the encoder management to switch on
RATION light / laser).
ON, ON: s.w.4.00 (following the button, the switching on of the board is
controlled by closing the contact)
If the board is configured as JP8 standard:
OFF:( pushing the button the status will change) (if on will switch off and
the other way around)
ON: The board works in renewal time mode. In this mode, each time the
button is pressed, the ignition time is renewed without switching off the
light.
If the light is already on, it continues to stay on but with renewed time.
Also applies to the laser if independent
The fan switches ON together with the LED, and operates 15 seconds
FAN
longer after the LED OFF.
Trimmers
Adjust the output current intensity to the LED.

TR1- CURRENT CONTROL Step-less current adjustment from 0 to 4.8 A.
-> Luxeon V LED - adjust current to ~ 2.2 A.
LEDs

GREEN LED 1 Power supply + 5 V
Indicates software version:

1 blink = standard sw
2 blinks = 3.01 sw
YELLOW LED 2
3 blinks = 5.00 sw
4 blinks = 4.00
LED 2 will stop blinking if LED 3 is ON.
Indicates an alarm type

Switch OFF - OK
1 blink = LED disconnected or faulty driver
2 blinks = LED short-circuited
LED 3 - ALARMS 3 blinks = Fan failure or disconnected
4 blinks = Laser failure of disconnected
5 blinks = Push button pressed longer than 5 seconds or short-circuited
6 blinks = Timer temperature >105°
7 blinks = LED temperature >110°
ALARM DIAGNOSTIC

The timer identifies anomalies/errors/malfunctions. The outgoing messages from J7 are managed and
interpreted by “intelligent board”
bit = 10 ms
byte:
1 bit sync (1)
8 bit data - transmission bit L....H
1 bit stop (0)
Output status:
0 = output disabled
1 = output enabled
BYTE 1: firmware version

BYTE 2: firmware mode + jumper status
bit7: firmware mode bit 1
bit6: firmware mode bit 0
bit5: JP13
bit4: JP12
bit3: JP11
bit2: JP10
bit1: JP9
bit0: JP8
BYTE 3: input/output status

bit7: 1 = LED push button pressed
bit6: 1 = Laser push button pressed
bit5: 1 = ENC1 input activated
bit4: 1 = ENC2 input activated
bit3: 1 = O.C. output activated
bit2: 1 = Laser ON
bit1: 1 = Fan ON
bit0: 1 = LED ON
BYTE 4: alarms:
bit7:
bit6: High LED temperature
bit5: High timer temperature
bit4: Push button pressed more than 5 seconds
bit3: Laser error

bit2: Fan error
bit1: LED short-circuited
bit0: LED disconnected or faulty driver

SYSTEM START-UP
On system power-up, board RSR008 software performs a series of internal self-tests aimed at
self-assessment. Depending on the position of the key at the back of the collimator, the
automatic or manual control phase will initiate on receipt of CanBus controls.
The display will then read the following information:
R225 ACS Collimator
Serial Number 12345
Where 12345 stands for the serial number (see programming of serial number)
In the normal mode, HW and SW versions of the board RSR008 will be displayed:
RSR008
Hw 0.00 Sw 0.00
The display will then provide current collimator functional parameters:

CROSS 0 LONG 0
SID 0
Current filtering level will be shown if a four-position radiological filter (0 Al) is in place:
CROSS 0 LONG 0
SID 0 0AL
NOTE
THE SYSTEM MAY BE PROGRAMMED TO DISPLAY THE KEY STATUS.

IN THIS CASE, THE SECOND LINE WILL DISPLAY A “CLOSED PADLOCK” IF THE
KEY IS IN THE “AUTOMATIC” MODE AND AN “OPEN PADLOCK” IF THE KEY IS
IN THE MANUAL MODE.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - System Start-Up
If the operator wishes to configure the system to different requirements, the “configuration”
mode must be initiated by keeping pressed “filter” and “lamp” push button while turning the
system ON.
Current CanBus communication speed is displayed; this value may be changed.

BOARD CONFIGURATION
Can Speed 500 kBits/s
followed by:
W a i t C o m m a n d.........
The operator may send the CanBus strings to perform collimator configuration. Configuration
parameters and relative strings are described in the following paragraph.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS SYSTEM START-UP

DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION CONTROLS

The collimator configuration is performed by sending CAN Bus messages to ID 0x600, DLC=8.
Data Writing
Send the message using ID=0x600 as shown in the below chart “CanBus Messages”.
Data Reading
Send the message using ID=0x601 and D0 with a number as shown in the below chart.
The collimator will reply through ID=0x602 message using formatted data according to the
below chart.
Note: Byte D1 and D2 must be specified if the subcontrol 0x38 is required.
For each sent control the operator will get feedback on the display, therefore, it will be possible
to check the correctness of the configuration.
A Warning will be displayed in the event of an error message.
NOTE
TO SET THE MAXIMUM CROSS AND LONG OPENING, SEND THE VALUE IN MM
EXPRESSED IN A 16 BIT NUMBER, EG:
430 MM CORRESPOND TO: 0X01 0XAE
250 MM CORRESPOND TO: 0X00 0XFA

UPDATING OF FIRMWARE
NOTE
FIRMWARE VERSIONS ARE UPDATED WITH LOADER.EXE PROGRAM

SUPPLIED BY RALCO SRL.
Functional Overview
The Loader_2.1 is a Hardware + Software
tool used to directly connect the USB Serial
Converter to the X-Ray collimator and to con-
figure X-Ray Collimator parameters accord-
ing to RALCO CAN communication protocol.
Bill of Material
The Loader_2.1 tool requires the following
items:
• Loader_2.1 Application Program.
• USB Serial Converter.

Installation
USB Serial Converter
In order to install the USB Serial Converter, it’s enough to connect it to the PC, and it will be
automatically recognized as a serial port.
Loader_2.1 Application Program
In order to install the Loader_2.1 Application Program, simply unzip the .rar archive provided
by RALCO into the selected folder.
Workflow
Following the detailed workflow.

HW Setup
connect the USB Serial Converter adapter to
the PC and to the Serial Port placed into the
RSR008 PCB (visible by unmounting the
XRay Collimator front panel).
Connect the X-Ray Collimator to the power
supply but keep it still powered OFF.
Config
Into the main folder of the Loader_2.1
Application program there is the file
seriale.txt.
Such file is used by the program to set the
following configurations:
1. COM Port Number : it’s the number of the
COM port to use. Such number shall
match exactly the number of the COM port
2. detected by the Operating System.

For instance, if Windows configures the USB Serial converter as COM5 (see image below).
The file seriale.txt shall be modified as follows:
COM = 5
BAUD_RATE = 115200
3. COM Baud Rate : it’s the baud rate used for the file transferring procedure. (that is equal
to 115200kHz for the X-Ray Collimators).
Copy
Copy the .COD file into the same folder where are stored both Loader_2.1.exe and seriale.txt
files.
Such file contains the Firmware to upgrade into the X-Ray Collimator.
Important note:
Use only.COD firmware files provided and approved by RALCO S.r.l. Any other file different
from these ones can be responsible of a malfunctioning of the collimator.

Install
Firmware Upload Complete
Open the Loader_2.1.exe file and power ON
the collimator.
If the configuration stage has been correctly
completed, the upload procedure shall start
automatically.
When the X-Ray Collimator upload is
completed, the tool retrieves the proper status
message.
If the firmware uploading procedure is completed successfully, the X-Ray Collimator shall
reboot automatically. If not, reboot it.
Issues List
The Loader_2.1 application program can retrieve error messages in one of the following
scenarios:
1. Fail to open COM port.
Possible Root Causes of the problem:

• the seriale.txt file has not been properly configured.
• the USB Serial Converter is not correctly connected both to the PC and / or to the X-Ray
Collimator Serial Port.
2. Firmware Upload does not start.

Possible Root Causes of the problem:

• The Bootloader is not installed on the RSR008 PCB.
• The X-Ray Collimator is not powered on.
• The RSR008 PCB is defective or broken.
• There are more than one COM devices active on the PC, and the Loader_2.1 application
program is trying to upload the firmware on the wrong one.
Configuration via Serial Interface
Configuration of the collimator via serial interface is performed in Ralco with updated software;
the customer will be required to load the software as described in the preceding paragraph.
POTENTIOMETER POSITIONING ALARMS
The alarm may be enabled in message 0x100 (0x7 D0) through 0x600 entering control 0x33 in
the configuration phase.
This message includes the control bytes for potentiometer positioning alarms.
When the collimator activates a movement alarm, the system will read the collimator alarm
state through message 0x100 and the number of alarms activated from start-up.
The red LED, Exposure Hold, on the collimator front panel flashes to indicate an alarm state.
Alarm State Reset
Turn the collimator key from automatic to manual. This will reset the shutters and Iris if
assembled.

CANSYSTEM RALCO R 225 ACS

FW
Type ID DLC RTR D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Description
Ver.
Requires to the Collimator to visualize on
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 the LCD display the string 1.00
fig
"RS232COMM".
Store into the RSR008 Flash Memory the
Tx_Con CSB_SerialN CSB_Serial CSB_Ser LSB_Seri
0x600 8 0 0x01 MSB_SerialNr 0x00 0x00 X-Ray Collimator serial number with the 1.00
fig r Nr ialNr alNr
provided value.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator language
displayed on the LCD screen with the
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x02 Coll_Language 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 provided setting value. 1.00
fig
Coll_Language : 0x01 = Italian.
Coll_Language : 0x02 = English. (default)
Configure the X-Ray Collimator
measurement unit displayed on the LCD
Tx_Con screen with the provided setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x03 Meas_Unit 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig Meas_Unit : 0x01 = Metric System.
(default)
Meas_Unit : 0x02 = Imperial System.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Cansystem ralco r 225 acs
Configure the X-Ray Collimator SID

visualization displayed on the LCD screen
with the provided setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x04 Show_SID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Show_SID : 0x00 = The LCD screen does 1.00
fig
not displays the SID value.
Show_SID : 0x01 = The LCD screen
displays the SID value. (default)
Configure the X-Ray Collimator spectral
filter wheel with the provided setting value.
SFW_Installed : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Tx_Con Collimator does not have the spectral filter
0x600 8 0 0x05 SFW_Installed 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig wheel installed. (default)
SFW_Installed : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator includes the spectral filter
wheel.
filter wheel thickness with the provided
setting value.
SFW_TickType : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator spectral filter wheel thickness is
1mm Al.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x06 SFW_TickType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator spectral filter wheel thickness is 1.00
fig
2mm Al. (default)
0.3mm Cu.
custom.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS CANSYSTEM RALCO R 225 ACS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL 53
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator light
automatic ignition with the provided
setting value.
AutoLight : 0x00 = The X-Ray Collimator
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x07 AutoLight 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 light is not automatically ignited while 1.00
fig
moving knobs.
AutoLight : 0x01 = The X-Ray Collimator
light is automatically ignited while moving
knobs.
inclinometer with the provided setting
value.
Tx_Con Incl_Installed : 0x00 = The X-Ray
0x600 8 0 0x08 Incl_Installed 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig Collimator does not have the inclinometer
installed. (default)
Incl_Installed : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator includes the inclinometer.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator automatic
limits of the squared field with the
provided setting value.
SquaredAutoLimits : 0x00 = The X-Ray

Tx_Con Collimator does not have the automatic
0x600 8 0 0x09 SquaredAutoLimits 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig limits of the squared field configured.
(default)
SquaredAutoLimits : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator has the automatic limits of the
squared field configured. (default)
Configure the X-Ray Collimator such that
the left side SID value is set according to
the provided setting value.
LeftSIDType : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator left side SID set with CAN
Tx_Con messages. (default)
0x600 8 0 0x0A LeftSIDType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
fig LeftSIDType : 0x02 = The X-Ray
Collimator left side SID set with discreet
input values.
LeftSIDType : 0x03 = The X-Ray
Collimator left side SID set with values
retrieved by the potentiometer.
the left receptor is set according to the
LeftReceptorType : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Collimator left receptor is not installed.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x0B LeftReceptorType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 LeftReceptorType : 0x01 = The X-Ray 1.00
fig
Collimator left receptor is set with CAN
messages (default).
LeftReceptorType : 0x02 = The X-Ray
Collimator left receptor is set with values
retrieved by the bucky.
FW
Ver.
the right receptor is set according to the
RightReceptorType : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Collimator right receptor is not installed.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x0C RightReceptorType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 RightReceptorType : 0x01 = The X-Ray 1.00
fig
Collimator right receptor is set with CAN
messages (default).
RightReceptorType : 0x02 = The X-Ray
Collimator right receptor is set with values
the vertical SID value is set according to
VertSIDType : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator left side SID set with CAN
messages. (default)
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x0D VertSIDType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator left side SID set with a constant 1.00
fig
value.

Collimator left side SID set with a single
input value.
Collimator left side SID set with a
differential input value.
the vertical receptor is set according to the
VertReceptorType : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Collimator right receptor is not installed.
Collimator right receptor is set with CAN
messages (default).
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x0E VertReceptorType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 VertReceptorType : 0x02 = The X-Ray 2.08
fig
Collimator right receptor is set according
to ATS specifications.
Collimator right receptor is set with values
Collimator right receptor is set with fixed
formats values retrieved by the firmware.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator fixed SID
(Source Image Distance) with the
provided setting value defined with bytes
Tx_Con MSB_FixedSI [MSB_FixedSIDValue;
0x600 8 0 0x0F LSB_FixedSIDValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
fig DValue LSB_FixedSIDValue].
FixedSIDValue : 100 cm (default)
FixedSIDValue eligible range of values :
[50;300]cm
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator maximum
fixed SID (Source Image Distance) with
the provided setting value defined with
Tx_Con MSB_MaxFix bytes [MSB_MaxFixedSIDValue;
0x600 8 0 0x10 LSB_MaxFixedSIDValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
fig edSIDValue LSB_MaxFixedSIDValue].
MaxFixedSIDValue : 180 cm (default)
MaxFixedSIDValue eligible range of
values : [50;300]cm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator minimum
fixed SID (Source Image Distance) with
the provided setting value defined with
Tx_Con MSB_MinFix bytes [MSB_MinFixedSIDValue;
0x600 8 0 0x11 LSB_MinFixedSIDValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
fig edSIDValue LSB_MinFixedSIDValue].
MinFixedSIDValue : 80 cm (default)
MinFixedSIDValue eligible range of values
: [50;300]cm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator vertical
STD (Source Table Distance) with the
Tx_Con provided setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x12 VertSTD 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
fig VertSTD : 0 cm (default)
VertSTD eligible range of values :

[0;15]cm
inclinometer alarm threshold with the
0x600 8 0 0x13 InclAlarmThreshold 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig InclAlarmThreshold : 3° (default)
InclAlarmThreshold eligible range of
values : [0;15]°
Configure the X-Ray Collimator return to
zero configuration of the spectral filter
wheel with the provided setting value.
SFW_RetToZero : 0x00 = The spectral
Tx_Con filter wheel does not return to the zero
0x600 8 0 0x14 SFW_RetToZero 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig position before reaching the target
position. (default)
SFW_RetToZero : 0x01 = The spectral
filter wheel returns to the zero position
before reaching the target position.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator key lock
icon visualization displayed on the LCD
screen with the provided setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x15 Show_KeyLock 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Show_KeyLock : 0x00 = The LCD screen 1.00
fig
does not displays the key lock icon.
Show_KeyLock : 0x01 = The LCD screen
displays the key lock icon. (default)
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator incline
angle visualization displayed on the LCD
screen with the provided setting value.
Tx_Con Show_KeyLock : 0x00 = The LCD screen
0x600 8 0 0x16 Show_InclAngle 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig does not displays the incline angle value.
Show_KeyLock : 0x01 = The LCD screen
displays the key incline angle value.
(default)
Configure the X-Ray Collimator return to
zero configuration of the squared field with
SqrdField_RetToZero : 0x00 = Shutters do
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x17 SqrdField_RetToZero 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 not return to the 0x0 position before 1.00
fig
reaching the target position. (default)
SqrdField_RetToZero : 0x01 = Shutters
return to the 0x0 position before reaching
the target position..
it will automatically retrieve offset
inclinometer data values for the selected
side. (the side is the same as the lexan

one)
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x18 0x01 Side 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Side : 0x00 = offset inclinometer data 2.18
fig
values retrieved for the vertical side.
Side : 0x01 = offset inclinometer data
values retrieved for the right side.
values retrieved for the left side.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator offset
inclinometer for the selected side with
provided setting values.
Tx_Con MSB_InclVal CSB_Incl CSB_Incl LSB_Incl
0x600 8 0 0x18 0x02 Side 0x00 values retrieved for the vertical side. 2.18
fig ue Value Value Value
values retrieved for the right side.
values retrieved for the left side.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Cross
shutter manual regulation steps with the
0x600 8 0 0x19 CrossSteps 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig CrossSteps : 0x0A. (default)
CrossSteps eligible range of values :
[1;20]mm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Long
shutter manual regulation steps with the
0x600 8 0 0x1A LongSteps 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig LongSteps : 0x0A. (default)
LongSteps eligible range of values :
[1;20]mm
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Cross
shutter opening adjustment with the
Such configuration depends on the 0x42
Configuration setting:
Tx_Con If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x01 : Cross
0x600 8 0 0x1B CrossCorrection 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.15
fig opening adjustment eligible range : [-
25;25]cm on SID value.
If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x02 : Cross
opening adjustment eligible range : [-
10.0;+10.0]% on Cross shutters actual
opening value.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Long
shutter opening adjustment with the
Tx_Con If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x01 : Long
0x600 8 0 0x1C LongCorrection 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.15
If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x02 : Long

10.0;+10.0]% on Long shutters actual
opening value.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator data
organization displayed on the LCD screen
DisplayVisualType : 0x01 = Data
displayed on the LCD according to
Tx_Con Standard configuration. (default)
0x600 8 0 0x1D DisplayVisualType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig DisplayVisualType : 0x02 = Data
displayed on the LCD according to
Sedecal configuration.
DisplayVisualType : 0x03 = Data
displayed on the LCD according to Open
configuration.
opening value for Cross shutters with the
LSB_MaxCro provided setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x1E MSB_MaxCrossOpeningValue ssOpeningVa 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 MaxCrossOpeningValue : 430mm. 1.00
fig
lue (default)
MaxCrossOpeningValue eligible range of
values : [0;500]mm
opening value for Long shutters with the
LSB_MaxLon provided setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x1F MSB_MaxLongOpeningValue gOpeningVal 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 MaxLongOpeningValue : 430mm. 1.00
fig
ue (default)
MaxLongOpeningValue eligible range of
values : [0;500]mm
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator encoders
sensitivity with the provided setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x20 EncodersSensitivity 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 EncodersSensitivity : 25ms. (default) 1.00
fig
EncodersSensitivity eligible range of
values : [0;250]ms
Configure the X-Ray Collimator encoders
inversion sensitivity with the provided
setting value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x21 EncodersInversionSensitivity 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 EncodersInversionSensitivity : 25ms. 1.00
fig
(default)
EncodersInversionSensitivity eligible
range of values : [0;250]ms
Configure the X-Ray Collimator shutters
configuration with the provided setting
value.
ShuttersConfiguration = 0x00 : Cross and
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x22 ShuttersConfiguration 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Long shutters are configured according to 1.00
fig
technical drawing. (default)
ShuttersConfiguration= 0x01 : Cross and
Long shutters are configured swapped

compared to technical drawing.
communication protocol with the provided
setting value.
CollCommProtocol= 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator operates with the Standard
Tx_Con Communication Protocol. (default)
0x600 8 0 0x23 CollCommProtocol 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig CollCommProtocol= 0x02 : the X-Ray
Collimator operates with the Sedecal
Communication Protocol.
CollCommProtocol= 0x03 : the X-Ray
Collimator operates with the GMM
Communication Protocol.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Baud
Rate with the provided setting value.
BaudRate= 0x01 : the X-Ray Collimator
operates witha Baud Rate of 1Mbit/s.
operates witha Baud Rate of 500kbit/s.
Tx_Con BaudRate= 0x04 : the X-Ray Collimator
0x600 8 0 0x24 BaudRate 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig operates witha Baud Rate of 125kbit/s.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator number of
steps that the spectral filter wheel needs
to perform in order to reach each position
Tx_Con LSB_SFW_S
0x600 8 0 0x28 MSB_SFW_StepsPosition 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 with the provided setting value. 1.00
fig tepsPosition
StepsPosition : 4262. (default)
StepsPosition eligible range of values :
[0;12000]
Configure the X-Ray Collimator analog
input with the provided setting value.
AnalogInputUsage = 0x01 : the RSR008
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x29 AnalogInputUsage 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Analog Input is used for the proximity 1.00
fig
sensor. (default)
AnalogInputUsage = 0x02 : the RSR008
Analog Input is not used.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator command
message ID with the provided setting
Tx_Con LSB_Comma value.
0x600 8 0 0x2A MSB_CommandID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig ndID CommandID : 0x7A0. (default)
CommandID eligible range of values :
[0x000;0x7F0]

frequency of shutters (when they operate
in FAST mode) with the provided setting
Tx_Con LSB_FAST_
0x600 8 0 0x2B MSB_FAST_ShutMaxFreq 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 value. 1.02
fig ShutMaxFreq
ShutMaxFreq : 6000 (Hz)
ShutMaxFreq eligible range of values :
[500;7000]Hz
Configure the X-Ray Collimator calibration
values (Maximum number of steps,
Reference Size, Reference Steps number
Tx_Con LSB_MaxSte MSB_RefSiz LSB_Ref MSB_Ref LSB_Ref ) for the Cross shutter with the provided
0x600 8 0 0x2C MSB_MaxSteps 0x00 1.05
fig ps e Size Steps Steps setting values.
MaxSteps : 7050.
RefSize : 495.
RefStep : 7050.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator calibration

values (Maximum number of steps,
Reference Size, Reference Steps number
Tx_Con LSB_MaxSte MSB_RefSiz LSB_Ref MSB_Ref LSB_Ref ) for the Long shutter with the provided
0x600 8 0 0x2D MSB_MaxSteps 0x00 1.05
fig ps e Size Steps Steps setting values.
MaxSteps : 5540.
RefSize : 495.
RefStep : 5540.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator rotative

board ID with the provided setting value.
Tx_Con LSB_RotCom
0x600 8 0 0x2E MSB_RotCommandID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 RotCommandID : 0x740. (default) 1.00
fig mandID
CommandID eligible range of values :
[0x000;0x7F0]
FW
Ver.
filter wheel type with the provided setting
value.
SpectralFilterType = 0x01 : on the
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x2F SpectralFilterType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 collimator is installed the 1-HOLE spectral 1.10
fig
filter wheel.
SpectralFilterType = 0x02 : on the
collimator is installed the 5-HOLES
spectral filter wheel.(default)
potentiometers with the provided setting
value.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x30 PotInstalled 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 PotInstalled = 0x00 : potentiometers not 1.11
fig
installed.(default)
PotInstalled = 0x01 : potentiometers
installed.
potentiometers with shutters totally
Tx_Con opened.
0x600 8 0 0x31 SettingsPotOpened 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.11
fig SettingsPotOpened = 0x01 : start
potentiometers configuration with totally

opened shutters.
potentiometers with shutters totally
Tx_Con closed.
0x600 8 0 0x32 SettingsPotClosed 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.11
fig SettingsPotOpened = 0x01 : start
potentiometers configuration with totally
closed shutters.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator 0x100
alarm message with the provided setting
value.
EnableAlarmMsg = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x33 EnableAlarmMsg 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator does not retrieve the 0x100 1.11
fig
Alarm Message.(default)
EnableAlarmMsg = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator retrieves the 0x100 Alarm
Message.
Configure the X-Ray Collimatorrotation
Tx_Con EnableCollRot = 0x00 : the X-Ray
0x600 8 0 0x34 EnableCollRot 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.11
fig Collimator rotation is disabled.(default)
EnableCollRot = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator rotation is enabled.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator iris with
IRIS_Installed : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x35 IRIS_Installed 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator does not have the iris installed. 1.11
fig
(default)
IRIS_Installed : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator includes the iris.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator iris
command ID with the provided setting
Tx_Con LSB_IrisCom value.
0x600 8 0 0x36 MSB_IrisCommandID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.11
fig mandID IrisCommandID : 0x750. (default)
IrisCommandID eligible range of values :
[0x000;0x7F0]
Configure the X-Ray Collimator proximity
sensor type with the provided setting
value.
ProxSensorType : 0x00 = The X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x37 ProxSensorType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator includes the old PNP proximity 1.12
fig
sensor type.
ProxSensorType : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator includes the new NPP
proximity sensor type. (default)
fixed formats for both Cross and Long
Tx_Con FormatsNum shutters with the provided setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.12
fig ber FormatsNumber : 0x00. (default)
FormatsNumber eligible range of values :
[0x00;0x05]
Configure the aperture value (in cm) for
the selected fixed format for both Cross
and Long shutters with the provided
setting values.
CrossFixedFormatAperture = opening
CrossFixedF LongFixe value for Cross shutters for the fixed
Tx_Con FormatNumb
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x02 ormatApertu dFormat 0x00 0x00 0x00 format selected. 1.12
fig er
re Aperture LongFixedFormatAperture = opening
value for Long shutters for the fixed format
selected.
CrossFixedFormatAperture,
LongFixedFormatAperture eligible range
of values : [0x00;0x2B]cm
Configure the aperture value (in inches)
for the selected fixed format for both
Cross and Long shutters with the provided
setting values.
CrossFixedFormatAperture = opening
CrossFixedF LongFixe value for Cross shutters for the fixed
Tx_Con FormatNumb
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x03 ormatApertu dFormat 0x00 0x00 0x00 format selected. 1.12
fig er
re Aperture LongFixedFormatAperture = opening
value for Long shutters for the fixed format
selected.
CrossFixedFormatAperture,
LongFixedFormatAperture eligible range
of values : [0x00;0x11]inch
FW
Ver.
fixed formats for the iris with the provided
Tx_Con FormatsNum setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
fig ber FormatsNumber : 0x00. (default)
FormatsNumber eligible range of values :
[0x00;0x05]
Configure the aperture value (in cm) for
the selected fixed format for the iris with
the provided setting values.
Tx_Con FormatNumb IrisFixedFor
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x05 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 IrisFixedFormatAperture = opening value 2.08
fig er matAperture
for the iris for the fixed format selected.
IrisFixedFormatAperture eligible range of
values : [0x00;0x2B]cm
Configure the aperture value (in inches)
for the selected fixed format for the iris
with the provided setting values.
Tx_Con FormatNumb IrisFixedFor
0x600 8 0 0x38 0x06 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 IrisFixedFormatAperture = opening value 2.08
fig er matAperture
for the iris for the fixed format selected.
IrisFixedFormatAperture eligible range of
values : [0x00;0x11]inch

filter wheel filter sequence with the
Tx_Con provided setting values.
0x600 8 0 0x39 Filter1 Filter2 Filter3 Filter4 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.13
fig Default Filter Sequence = 0,1,2,3.
Filter1,Filter2,Filter3,Filter4 eligible range
of values : [0x00;0x03]
Configure the X-Ray Collimator message
that appears on the LCD at the power on.
SetFirmNameOnLCD = 0x00 : At the
power on, the LCD screen retreves the
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x3A SetFirmNameOnLCD 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 string "RALCO" 1.13
fig
SetFirmNameOnLCD = 0x01 : At the
power on, the LCD screen retreves the
string set with the 0x3B Configuration
message.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator message
that appears on the LCD at the power on
with the provided characters.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x3B Char1 Char2 Char3 Char4 Char5 Char6 Char7 Note : such string appears only if the 1.13
fig
SetFirmNameOnLCD parameter of the
0x3A configuration message is set to
0x01.
stepper motor frequency when moved by
LSB_Shutter
Tx_Con using proper CAN messages.
0x600 8 0 0x3C MSB_ShutterFreqMovement FreqMoveme 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.15
fig ShutterFreqMovement: 1500 Hz. (default)
nt
ShutterFreqMovement eligible range of
values : [0x1F4;0x1B58]Hz
FW
Ver.
movements with the provided setting
value.
EnableIrisMovements = 0x00 : Iris
movements disabled. (the iris opening
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x3D EnableIrisMovements 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 value is set to its maximum value) 2.00
fig
EnableIrisMovements = 0x01 : Iris
movements enabled.
Note : the iris shall be configured as
present, with the configuration command
0x35.
offset respect to the iris opening with the
0x600 8 0 0x3E ShuttersOffset 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.00
fig ShuttersOffset: 8mm. (default)
ShuttersOffset eligible range of values :
[0x00;0x14]mm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator ultrasonic
ruler with the provided setting value.
EnableUltrasonicRuler = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x3F EnableUltrasonicRuler 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator does not include the ultrasonic 2.01
fig
ruler.(default)
EnableUltrasonicRuler = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator includes the ultrasonic ruler.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator ultrasonic
Tx_Con LSB_OffsetUl
0x600 8 0 0x40 MSB_OffsetUltrasonicRuler 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 ruler offset with the provided setting value. 2.01
fig trasonicRuler
ShutterFreqMovement: 270mm. (default)
Configure the X-Ray Collimator stepper
motor type with the provided setting value.
SFW_StepperMotorType = 0x01 : the X-
Tx_Con Ray Collimator stepper motor type is the
0x600 8 0 0x41 SFW_StepperMotorType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.04
fig old model (round shape).(default)
SFW_StepperMotorType = 0x02 : the X-
Ray Collimator stepper motor type is the
new model (squared shape).
Configure the X-Ray Collimator format
correction type with the provided setting
value.
FormatCorrectionType = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator shutters opening correction
type is in cm respect to the actual SFD
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x42 FormatCorrectionType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 value. 2.04
fig
FormatCorrectionType = 0x02 : the X-Ray
Collimator shutters opening correction
type is in percentage respect to the
shutters opening value. (default)
NOTE : the changing of correction type
selected sets the correction data to 0.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator knobs
movement parameters(maximum
frequency sent to the stepper motor during
movements, knob rotation speed that
Tx_Con LSB_FMaxK Accelerat corresponds to FMax and knobs
0x600 8 0 0x43 MSB_FMaxKnobs SpeedLimit 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.05
fig nobs ion acceleration) with the provided setting
value.
FMaxKnobs = 7000Hz.
SpeedLimit = 4
Acceleration = 3
Configure the X-Ray Collimator manual
movement speed type with the provided
setting value.
ManMovSpeedType = 0x01 : Shutters are
Tx_Con manually moved at a constant frequency
0x600 8 0 0x44 ManMovSpeedType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
fig value (default).
ManMovSpeedType = 0x02 : Shutters are
manually moved at a frequency value
defined with the 0x45 configuration
command message.

movement speed ferquency with the
Tx_Con LSB_ManMo ManMovFreqSpeed : frequency value
0x600 8 0 0x45 MSB_ManMovFreqSpeed 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
fig vFreqSpeed defined for shutters manual movement.
ManMovFreqSpeed = 100 mm/s (default).
ManMovFreqSpeed eligible range of
values : [10;500] mm/s
Configure the RSR008 potentiometer
input with the provided setting value.
PotInputType = 0x01 : the RSR008
Tx_Con potentiometer input PIN is connected to
0x600 8 0 0x46 PotInputType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig the SINGLE STATIVE (Default).
PotInputType = 0x02 : the RSR008
potentiometer input PIN is connected to
the Table.
the right side SID value is set according to
RightSIDType : 0x01 = The X-Ray
Collimator right side SID set with CAN
Tx_Con messages. (default)
0x600 8 0 0x47 RightSIDType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
fig RightSIDType : 0x02 = The X-Ray
Collimator right side SID set with discreet
input values.
RightSIDType : 0x03 = The X-Ray
Collimator right side SID set with values
retrieved by the potentiometer.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator left STD
(Source Table Distance) with the provided
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x48 LeftSTD 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 setting value. 2.08
fig
LeftSTD : 0 cm (default)
LeftSTD eligible range of values : [0;15]cm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator right STD
(Source Table Distance) with the provided
Tx_Con setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x49 RightSTD 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
fig RightSTD : 0 cm (default)
RightSTD eligible range of values :
[0;15]cm
Configure the X-Ray Collimator minimum
formats with the provided setting value.
EnableMinFormats = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x4A EnableMinFormats 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator minimum formats are disabled 1.00
fig
(Default).
EnableMinFormats = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator minimum formats are enabled.
collimation with the provided setting value.

EnableManCollimation = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x4B EnableManCollimation 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Collimator manual collimation disabled. 2.11
fig
EnableManCollimation = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator manual collimation is enabled.
(default)
opening values visualization when the
collimator operates in radiology mode with
EnableIrisVisualValue = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Collimator LCD does not retrieve the iris
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x4C EnableIrisVisualValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 actual opening value when the collimator 2.12
fig
operates in radiology mode (it displays
only the string '--').
EnableIrisVisualValue = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator LCD retrieve the iris actual
opening value (in cm) when the collimator
operates in radiology mode.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator 0x7F5
frequency output with the provided setting
value.
Tx_Con LSB_0x7F5F 0x7F5FreqOutput = 0x00 : the 0x7F5
0x600 8 0 0x4D MSB_0x7F5FreqOutput 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
fig reqOutput output message is not retrieved (default).
0x7F5FreqOutput eligible range of values
: [50;1000]ms, emitted when the
potentiometer value changes.
FW
Ver.
Configure the name of the X-Ray
Collimator spectral filter selected with the
filterNr = number of the spectral filter for
which to set the LCD display name.
Tx_Con filterNr eligible range of values : [1;4]
0x600 8 0 0x4E filterNr CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 2.15
fig CH1…CH6 : first bundle of ASCII
Characters that indicates the spectral filter
name. 0x00 represent the end of line
character. If [CH1;CH6] does NOT contain
0x00, the spectral filter name will also
contains CH7...CH12.
Configure the name of the X-Ray
Collimator spectral filter selected with the
filterNr = number of the spectral filter for
Tx_Con which to set the LCD display name.
0x600 8 0 0x4F filterNr CH7 CH8 CH9 CH10 CH11 CH12 2.15
fig filterNr eligible range of values : [1;4]
CH7…CH12 : second bundle of ASCII
Characters that follows CH1...CH6 for
describing the spectral filter name. 0x00

represent the end of line character.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Iris
opening adjustment with the provided
setting value.
Tx_Con If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x01 : Iris
0x600 8 0 0x50 IrisCorrection 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.16
If 0x42 config. Setting = 0x02 : Iris
10.0;+10.0]% on Long shutters actual
opening value.
inclinometer filtering with the provided
setting value.
EnableInclFiltering = 0x00 : the
inclinometer filtering function is disabled
Tx_Con (The collimator retrieves the actual
0x600 8 0 0x51 EnableInclFiltering 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.17
fig inclinometer value).
EnableInclFiltering = 0x01 : the
inclinometer filtering function is enabled
(The collimator does not retrieve the
minimum and the maximum inclinometer
values in order to avoid data fluctuations).
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Base ID
for command messages with the provided
Tx_Con LSB_Comma setting value.
0x600 8 0 0x52 MSB_CommandBaseID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.18
fig ndBaseID CommandBaseID : 0x700. (default)
CommandBaseID eligible range of values
: [0x000;0x7F0]
Configure the X-Ray Collimator 0x7F8
acknowledge message with the provided
setting value.
Enable0x7F8Ack = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Collimator does not reply with a 0x7F8
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x53 Enable0x7F8Ack 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 event message after receiving a 0x7A3 2.18
fig
command message. (default)
Enable0x7F8Ack = 0x01 : the X-Ray
Collimator replies with a 0x7F8 event
message after receiving a 0x7A3
command message.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator in order to
simulate messages retrieved VILLA's
tables while pressing membrane buttons
on the X-Ray Collimator with the provided

setting value.
EnableTableKeyVILLA = 0x00 : the X-Ray
Collimator does not simulate VILLA
TABLE messages. (default)
Enable0x7F8Ack = 0x01 :the X-Ray
Tx_Con IDStatusOffs Collimator simulates VILLA TABLE status
0x600 8 0 0x54 EnableTableKeyVILLA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.18
fig et messages retrieved while pressing
membrane buttons installed on the
collimator front panel. Such status
messages are retrieved on the
ID_STATUS + IDStatusOffset id.
IDStatusOffset = 0x04 (default) : VILLA
TABLE status messages are retrieved on
0x7F4 ID,
IDStatusOffset eligible range of values :
[0x00;0x0F]
Configure the X-Ray Collimator ASR003
Status Message reception with the
EnableMexRecASR003 = 0x00 : ASR003
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x55 EnableMexRecASR003 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 message reception disabled. (default) 2.18
fig
EnableMexRecASR003 = 0x01 : ASR003
message reception enabled. Messages
are retrieved on
IIDs 0x7AA, 0x7AB, 0x7AC and 0x7AE.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator Tube
Angle value with the provided setting
value.
EnableCANTubeAngle = 0x00 : tube
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x56 EnableCANTubeAngle 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 angle value can be set with CAN 2.18
fig
messages disabled. (default)
EnableCANTubeAngle = 0x01 : tube
angle value cannot be set with CAN
messages enabled.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator knobs
jitter value with the provided setting value.
EnableKnobsJitter = 0x00 : knobs jittering
disabled. (default)
Tx_Con EnableKnobsJitter = 0x01 : knobs jittering
0x600 8 0 0x57 EnableKnobsJitter JitValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.20
fig enabled. JitValue represents the number
of impulses that shall be completed by
knobs after changing their rotation
movement in order to allow the Collimator
to move shutters.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator time
necessary for entering into Configuration

mode while pressing buttons installed on
the front panel with the provided setting
Tx_Con LSB_ConfTi value.
0x600 8 0 0x58 MSB_ConfTime 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.20
fig me MSB_ConfTime, LSB_ConfTime : time for
which is necessary to keep pressed
buttons installed on the fron panel of the
collimator in order to enter in configuration
mode. Default : 0xFA (25s)
inclinometer message timespan with the
MSB_InclRetTime, LSB_InclRetTime :
Tx_Con LSB_InclRet Timespan for the inclinometer status
0x600 8 0 0x59 MSB_InclRetTime 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.20
fig Time message.
InclRetTime Default value : 0 (message
not retrieved)
InclRetTime eligible range of values : [0;
2000] ms.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator rounding
function for shutters closing apertures with
Tx_Con EnRoundZero = 0x00 : shutters actual
0x600 8 0 0x5A EnRoundZero 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.20
fig values rounded to zero while opening
value is equal to 3 mm or less. (default)
EnRoundZero = 0x01 : shutters actual
values not rounded to zero.
FW
Ver.
Configure the X-Ray Collimator totally
closed shutters indication threshold with
Tx_Con LSB_Closure MSB_ClosureValue, LSB_ClosureValue :
0x600 8 0 0x5B MSB_ClosureValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.22
fig Value closure value that at lease one shutter has
to reach such that the collimator retrieves
on its status messages that at least one
shutter is totally closed.
Save the X-ay Collimator configuration
parameters with values set.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0x64 SaveConfig 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 SaveConfig = 0x00 : discard 1.00
fig
modifications.
SaveConfig = 0x01 : save modifications.
Restore the X-Ray Collimator
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0xFD 0x55 0xAA 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 configuration parameters to their default 2.15
fig
values.
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0xFE 0x55 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Reboot the X-Ray Collimator. 2.00
fig
Enable or disable the X-Ray Collimator
stepper motor configuration paratemer.

EnStepperMotorModif = 0x00 : Disable
Tx_Con
0x600 8 0 0xFF EnStepperMotorModif 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 the stepper motor configuration 2.00
fig
parameter.
EnStepperMotorModif = 0x01 :Enable the
stepper motor configuration parameter.
Tx_Con Read the X-Ray Collimator Configuration
0x601 8 0 Mux 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
fig Value for the parameter specified by Mux.
Message retrieved from the collimator as
Rx_Con response to the 0x601 Configuration
0x602 8 0 Mux Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1.00
fig Message with the actual Value for the
configuration parameter specified by Mux.
FW
Ver.
b7 : 1
NON-GMM Communication
Protocol
disable format limits
(configuration not saved in Flash
Memory)
GMM Communication Protocol
Set the spectral filter wheel to

position defined by bits b7 and
b7 : 1 = The X-Ray b5)
Collimator operates b6 : not used.
in Manual Mode (for b5: 1 (for GMM Communication
STANDARD and Protocol only)
GMM Set the spectral filter wheel to
Communication position defined by bits b7 and
protocol only) b5)
b6 : 1 = The X-Ray b4: 0 = if the collimator operates
Collimator operates in Radiology mode, totally open
in Automatic Mode the iris diaphragm b7 : not used. MSB_Cro LSB_Cro
(for STANDARD and b4 : 1 = move the iris diaphragm b6 : 1 = ssValue ssValue

GMM to the opening value set with the MSB_SIDVal MSB_Iris LSB_Iris
Communication command 0x7A3 sub 0x0A. ue. Value (if Value (if
Tx_Co protocol only) b3 : 1 = while sending the 0x7A0 b5: not used. LSB_SIDVal the the MSB_Lo LSB_Lon
0x7A0 8 0 Command Message. 1.00
mmand b5 : 1 = Totally Close command, ignore data written in b4: not used. ue collimator collimator ngValue gValue
Cross shutter. bytes D3,D4,D5,D6,D7. b3 : not used. operates operates
b4 : 1 = Totally Open b2: 0 = the collimator operates in b2 : not used. in in
Cross shutter. Radiology mode. b1 : not used. fluorosco fluorosco
b3 : 1 = Totally Close b2 : 1 = the collimator operates in b0 : not used. py mode) py mode)
Long shutter. Fluoroscopy mode.
b2 : 1 = Totally Open b1 : 1 = move the spectral filter
Long shutter.y. wheel to the adjacent position
b1 : 1 = Totally (for STANDARD and SEDECAL
Close Iris Diaphragm communication protocol only).
(if present). Standard Communication
b0 : 1 = Totally Open Protocol
Iris Diaphragm (if b0 : 1 = revert the actual light
present). status.
b0 : 0 = don't change the actual
light status.
Sedecal Communication
Protocol
b0 : 1 = switch the light ON.
b0 : 0 = don't change the actual
light status.
GMM Communication Protocol
b0 : 1 = switch the light ON.
b0 : 0 = switch the light OFF.
Tx_Co LSB_IrisValu
0x7A0 6 0 0x01 MSB_IrisValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 Command Message. 1.00
mmand e
Tx_Co Cross Shutter Incline Long Shutter Incline Value
0x7A0 2 0 Command Message. 1.00
mmand Value [0;70°] [0;70°]
FW
Ver.
MSB_Rig LSB_Rig MSB_Rig LSB_Rig Command message used in order to set
Tx_Co MSB_LeftCrossValu MSB_LeftLon LSB_LeftLo
0x7A1 8 0 LSB_LeftCrossValue htCrossV htCrossV htLongVa htLongVa lateral side formats for both Cross and 1.00
mmand e gValue ngValue
alue alue lue lue Long shuttters.
Tx_Co MSB_LateralSIDVal Command message used in order to set
0x7A2 8 0 LSB_LateralSIDValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand ue the lateral SID value.
Command message used to moves the
Tx_Co spectral filter wheel to the provided
0x7A3 8 0 0x01 Filter_position 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand position.
Filter_position = [0x00; 0x03].
Tx_Co Command message used for requiring the
0x7A3 8 0 0x02 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand PCB serial number.
Command message used to change the
actual LIGHT status.
Tx_Co If light ON, after sending this command it
0x7A3 8 0 0x03 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand is switched OFF.
If light is OFF, after sending this command
it is switched ON.
Tx_Co Command message used to switch ON
0x7A3 8 0 0x04 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand the D21 led installed on the RSR008 PCB.
Tx_Co Command message used to switch OFF

0x7A3 8 0 0x05 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand the D21 led installed on the RSR008 PCB.
actual speed of shutters while moving in
Tx_Co LSB_Stepper
0x7A3 8 0 0x06 MSB_StepperMotorFreq 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 automatic mode with the provided value. 1.15
mmand MotorFreq
MSB_StepperMotorFreq,
LSB_StepperMotorFreq = [500;6000] Hz
actual speed of shutters while moving in
Tx_Co LSB_Stepper
0x7A3 8 0 0x07 MSB_StepperMotorFreq 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 manual mode with the provided value. 1.15
mmand MotorFreq
MSB_StepperMotorFreq,
LSB_StepperMotorFreq = [500;6000] Hz
actual LIGHT status.
Tx_Co LightStatus = 0x00 : the LIGHT is switched
0x7A3 8 0 0x08 LightStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.15
mmand OFF.
LightStatus = 0x01 : the LIGHT is switched
ON.
actual Inlcinometer status.
InclStatus = 0x00 : the INCLINOMETER is
disabled. (collimator always considered as
vertical)
Tx_Co InclStatus = 0x01 : the INCLINOMETER is
0x7A3 8 0 0x09 InclStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.15
mmand enabled.
Note : this is a temporary setting : at the
power on, the inclinometer status is the
same as per defined in configuration.
Note 2 : this command works only if the
inclinometer is enabled in configuration.
FW
Ver.
Command message used to set the
maximum opening value of the Iris
Tx_Co LSB_IrisOpe diaphragm.
0x7A3 8 0 0x0A MSB_IrisOpening 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.00
mmand ning MSB_IrisOpening, LSB_IrisOpening :
maximum opening value of the Iris
diaphragm [mm]
shutters moving type when moevements
are performed with message 0x7A0 sub
D1.
ShuttersMovingType = 0x01 : shutters are
Tx_Co
0x7A3 8 0 0x0B ShuttersMovingType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 moved with constant frequency (as per 2.06
mmand
defined with the 0x7A3 sub. 0x07
command)
ShuttersMovingType = 0x02 : shutters are
moved with constant speed, even if SID is
changed.
shutters speed when moevements are
performed with message 0x7A0 sub D1.
Tx_Co MSB_Shutter LSB_Shutter Shutter = 0x00 : Cross Shutter Selected.

0x7A3 8 0 0x0C Shutter 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
mmand Speed Speed Shutter = 0x01 : Long Shutter Selected.
MSB_ShutterSpeed, LSB_ShutterSpeed :
shutter speed set [10; 500] mm/s. Default :
100mm/s
Command message used to set the actual
KNOBS status.
Tx_Co KnobsStatus = 0x00 : knobs are
0x7A3 8 0 0x0D KnobsStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
mmand DISABLED.
KnobsStatus = 0x01 : knobs are
ENABLED.
FILTER BUTTON status.
Tx_Co FilterButtonStatus = 0x00 : Filter Button is
0x7A3 8 0 0x0E FilterButtonStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
mmand DISABLED.
FilterButtonStatus = 0x01 : Filter Button is
ENABLED.
LIGHT BUTTON status.
Tx_Co LightButtonStatus = 0x00 : Light Button is
0x7A3 8 0 0x0F LightButtonStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.06
mmand DISABLED.
LightButtonStatus = 0x01 : Light Button is
ENABLED.
FW
Ver.
IRIS status.
IrisStatus = 0x00 : Iris Diaphragm is
DISABLED.
Tx_Co
0x7A3 8 0 0x10 IrisStatus CmdType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 IrisStatus = 0x01 : Iris Diaphragm is 2.08
mmand
ENABLED.
CmdType = 0x00 : Temporary Setting.
CmdType = 0x01 : Prrmanent Setting.
(setting value is saved in flash memory)
IRIS movement type.
IrisMovementType = 0x00 : Iris Diaphragm
Movements follow the shutters ones.
Tx_Co IrisMovementType = 0x01 : Iris Diaphragm
0x7A3 8 0 0x11 IrisMovementType CmdType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
mmand Movements are independent from the
shutters ones.
CmdType = 0x00 : Temporary Setting.
IRIS DIAPHRAGM BUTTON status.

Tx_Co IrisButtonStatus = 0x00 : Iris Diaphragm
0x7A3 8 0 0x12 IrisButtonStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.08
mmand Button is DISABLED.
IrisButtonStatus = 0x01 : Iris Diaphragm
Button is ENABLED.

LIGHT trigger time.
Tx_Co LightTriggerTime = [5;60]s. Default : 5s.
0x7A3 8 0 0x13 LightTriggerTime CmdType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.13
mmand CmdType = 0x00 : Temporary Setting.
Command message used to ignite the

LIGHT for the trigger time set with the
0x7A3 sub 0x13.
Tx_Co
0x7A3 8 0 0x14 LightStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 LightStatus = 0x00 : the LIGHT is switched 2.13
mmand
OFF.
LightStatus = 0x01 : the LIGHT is switched
ON for the trigger time set, then OFF.
FW
Ver.

icon status showed on the TFT display.
TFTVisualIcon = 0x01 : X-Ray Icon.
IconStatus = 0x00 : X-Ray Icon OFF
IconStatus = 0x01 : X-Ray Icon ON
TFTVisualIcon = 0x02 : SID Icon.
Tx_Co IconStatus = 0x00 : Under Table SID Icon
0x7A3 8 0 0x15 TFTVisualIcon IconStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.18
mmand ON
IconStatus = 0x01 : Over Table SID Icon
ON
IconStatus = 0x02 : Free Exp SID Icon ON
TFTVisualIcon = 0x03 :Column Icon.
IconStatus = actual Column angle Value [-
99;+99]°

0x7F4 event generation status.
Tx_Co EventStatus = 0x00 : 0x7F4 event

0x7A3 8 0 0xF0 EventStatus 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
mmand messages not retrieved by the collimator.
EventStatus = 0x01 : 0x7F4 event
messages retrieved by the collimator.
optical fork step test status.
Tx_Co OptForkStepTest = 0x00 : optical fork test
0x7A3 8 0 0xF1 OptForkStepTest 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
mmand step disabled.
OptForkStepTest = 0x01 : optical fork test
step enabled.
inclinometer simulation status.
InclSimStatus = 0x00 : the inclinometer
simulation is disabled.
InclSimStatus = 0x01 : the inclinometer
simulation is enabled.
Tx_Co
0x7A3 8 0 0xFD InclSimStatus InclValue 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 InclValue = 0x00 : Error simulation. 2.08
mmand
InclValue = 0x01 : Vertical Inclination
simulation.
InclValue = 0x02 : Left Inclination
simulation.
InclValue = 0x03 : Right Inclination
simulation.
Command message used to perform the
X-Ray Collimator Reboot.
RebootType = 0x55 : physical reboot the
Tx_Co
0x7A3 8 0 0xFE RebootType 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 collimator. 2.15
mmand
RebootType = 0x56 : at the next reboot,
the collimator enters in Configuration
mode.
FW
Ver.
Command message used to set the X-Ray
Collimator Actual Operating Mode.
Tx_Co CollOperMode = 0x80 : the collimator is in
0x7A4 8 0 CollOperMode 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand Manual Mode.
CollOperMode = 0x40 : the collimator is in
Automatic Mode.
Command message used to set the X-Ray
Collimator Actual SID value.
Tx_Co
0x7A5 8 0 LSB_SID MSB_SID 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 MSB_SID, LSB_SID : actual SID value, 1.00
mmand
whose eligible range of values is the one
set with Configuration Message.
Command message used to get the X-
Tx_Co
0x7A6 8 1 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Ray Collimator RSR008 PCB Actual HW/ 2.00
mmand
FW Version.
Command message used to get the X-
Rx_Co
0x7A6 8 1 MSB_HW CSB_HW CSB_HW LSB_HW 0x53 MSB_FW CSB_FW LSB_FW Ray Collimator RSR008 PCB Actual HW/ 2.00
mmand
FW Version.
Command message used to set the output
frequency status messages (in msec).
(default value : 0ms)

MSB_0x7F0, LSB_0x7F0 : output
frequency for the 0x7F0 status message.
MSB_0x7F1, LSB_0x7F1 : output
Tx_Co MSB_0x7 LSB_0x7 LSB_0x7 LSB_0x7 frequency for the 0x7F1 status message.
0x7A7 8 0 MSB_0x7F0 LSB_0x7F0 MSB_0x7F1 LSB_0x7F1 1.00
mmand F9 F9 FC FC MSB_0x7F9, LSB_0x7F9 : output
frequency for the 0x7F9 status message.
MSB_0x7FC, LSB_0x7FC : output
frequency for the 0x7FC status message.
Note : if the frequency output message set
is lower than 100ms, the output message
is retrieved only once.
Command message used to set the output
frequency status messages (in msec).
(default value : 0ms)
MSB_MaxCross, LSB_MaxCross :
Maximum Cross Opening Value. (default :
430mm)
MSB_MaxLong, LSB_MaxLong :
Minimum Long Opening Value. (default :
Tx_Co MSB_MaxLo LSB_MaxLo MSB_Min LSB_Min MSB_Min LSB_Min
0x7A8 8 0 MSB_MaxCross LSB_MaxCross 430mm) 2.05
mmand ng ng Cross Cross Long Long
MSB_MinCross, LSB_MinCross :
Maximum Cross Opening Value. (default :
0mm)
MSB_MinLong, LSB_MinLong : Minimum
Long Opening Value. (default : 0mm)
Note : it's possible to set Minimum Cross
and Long opening values only if they are
enabled in configuration.
FW
Ver.
Tx_Co
0x7A9 8 0 LightTriggerTime 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 LIGHT trigger time. 1.00
mmand
LightTriggerTime = [5;60]s. Default : 5s.
b0 : 1 =
b1 : 1 =
Set
Lateral
b0 : = not SID to
used. position b0 : = not
b0 : 1 =
b1 : = not 2. used.
close Iris
used. b2 : 1 = b1 : = not
Diaphragm.
b2 : 1 = Set Set used. b0 : = not
b1 : 1 = Set
Fixed Format Lateral b2 : = not used.
Spectral b0 : = not
#5. SID to used. b1 : = not
b0 : 1 = left side Filter Wheel used.
b3 : 1 = Set position b3 : 1 = used.
panoramic enabled. in posiiton 1. b1 : = not
Fixed Format 3. Set b2 : = not
b1 : 1 = right side b2 : = not used.
#4. b3 : 1 = Spectral used.
bucky enabled. used. b2 : = not
b4 : 1 = Set Set Filter b3 : 1 =
b2 : 1 = right side b0 : = not used. b3 : 1 = Set used.
Fixed Format Lateral Wheel in Set
panoramic enabled. b1 : = not used. Lateral SID b3 : = not
#3. Panorami posiiton Tomogra

b3 : 1 = open Long b2 : = not used. to position 1. used.
b5 : 1 = Set c SID to 4. phy Command message used from the
Tx_Co Shutter. b3 : = not used. b4 : 1 = Set b4 : 1 =
0x7AA 8 0 Fixed Format position b4 : 1 = Mode. ASR003 External Board in order to set the 1.00
mmand b4 : 1 = close Long b4 : = not used. Spectral Read
#2. 1. Switch b4 : 1 = actual external board digital input status.
Shutter. b5 : = not used. Filter Wheel Calibratio
b6 : 1 = Set b4 : 1 = the Light Set
b5 : 1 = open Cross b6 : = not used. in posiiton 2. n.
Fixed Format Set ON. Manual
Shutter. b7 : 1 = left side bucky enabled. b5 : 1 = Set b5 : = not
#1. Lateral b4 : 0 = Operatio
b6 : 1 = close Cross Spectral used.
b7 : 1 = The Panorami Switch n Mode.
Shutter. Filter Wheel b6 : = not
collimator c SID to the Light b5 : = not
b7 : 1 = open Iris in posiiton 3. used.
operates in position OFF used.
Diaphragm. b6 : 1 = Set b7 : = not
Fluoroscopy 2. b5 : = not b6 : = not
Lateral SID used.
Mode. b5 : = not used. used.
to position 5.
b7 : 0 = The used. b6 : = not b7 : 1 =
b7 : 1 = Set
collimator b6 : 1 = used.
Lateral SID
operates in Inclinome b7 : = not
to position 4.
Radiology ter used.
Mode. Disabled
Temporar
ily.
b7 : = not
used.
FW
Ver.
Command message used from the
ASR003 External Board in order to set the
actual potentiometers voltage value.
MSB_VPotStat,LSB_VPotStat = actual
stative potentiometer voltage value.
MSB_VP
LSB_VPo MSB_VP LSB_VPo MSB_VPotTable,LSB_VPotTable = actual
Tx_Co MSB_VPotTa LSB_VPotT otBuckyC
0x7AB 8 0 MSB_VPotStat LSB_VPotStat tBuckyCr otBuckyL tBuckyLo table potentiometer voltage value. 1.00
mmand ble able rossTabl
ossTable ongTable ngTable MSB_VPotBuckyCrossTable,LSB_VPotB
e
uckyCrossTable = actual Cross Bucky
Table potentiometer voltage value.
MSB_VPotBuckyLongTable,LSB_VPotBu
ckyLongTable = actual Long Bucky Table
potentiometer voltage value.
Command message used from the
ASR003 External Board in order to set the
actual potentiometers voltage value.
MSB_VPotBuckyCrossLeft,LSB_VPotBuc
kyCrossLeft = actual Cross Bucky Left
LSB_VPotB MSB_VP LSB_VPo MSB_VP LSB_VPo MSB_VPotBuckyLongLeft,LSB_VPotBuck
Tx_Co MSB_VPotBuckyCro MSB_VPotBu

0x7AC 8 0 LSB_VPotBuckyCrossLeft uckyLongLef otBuckyC tBuckyCr otBuckyL tBuckyLo yLongLeft =actual Long Bucky Left 1.00
mmand ssLeft ckyLongLeft
t rossRight ossRight ongRight ngRight potentiometer voltage value.
MSB_VPotBuckyCrossRight,LSB_VPotBu
ckyCrossRight = actual Cross Bucky Right
MSB_VPotBuckyLongRight,LSB_VPotBu
ckyLongRight = actual Long Bucky Right
FW
Ver.
If D0 b7 = 0
If Format
If D0 b7 = 0
Correction
If Format
Type (0x600
Correction
sub 0x42)
Type (0x600
set is in cm
sub 0x42) set
respect to
is in cm
the actual
respect to the
SFD value.
actual SFD
D2 = Long
b0 : 1 = Set English value.
Correction
Language. D2 = Cross
Value [-
b1 : 1 = Set Italian Correction
25;+25]cm
Language. Value [-
If Format
b2 : 1 = Set Metric 25;+25]cm
Correction
Measurement Unit. If Format
Type (0x600
b3 : 1 = Set Imperial Correction
sub 0x42)
Measurement Unit. If D0 b7 = 1 Type (0x600 Command message used to set some
Tx_Co set in
0x7AD 8 0 b4 : 1 = Cross SID D1 = 0x01 = Set Iris Diaphragm sub 0x42) set Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used configuration parameters without entering 2.00
mmand percentage
correction as per Status. in percentage in Configuration Mode.
respect to
defined in D2. respect to the
the shutters
b5 : 1 = Long SID shutters
opening
correction as per opening
value.
defined in D3. value.
D2 = Long
b6 : = not used. D2 = Cross
Correction
b7 : 1 = Sub D1 Correction
Value [-
Used. Value [-
10;+10]%
10;+10]%
If D0 b7 = 1
If D0 b7 = 1
D3 = 0x00 :
D2 = 0x00 :
Save
Disable Iris
Settings
Diaphragm.
Temporarily.
D2 = 0x01 :
D3 = 0x01 :
Enable Iris
Save
Diaphragm.
Settings
Permanently
Tx_Co Command message used to get the actual
0x7AE 8 0 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 1.00
mmand ARS003 External Board FW Version.
Command message used exactly as the
0x600 Configuration message in order to
set X-Ray Collimator Configuration
Parameters without entering in
Configuration mode.
Tx_Co
0x7AF 8 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Note : in order to make changes effective, 2.00
mmand
it's mandatory to save configuration
values and to reboot the collimator by
using the following messages:
0x7AF 8 0x64 0x01
0x7AF 8 0xFE 0x55
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 =
spectral filter
wheel actual
position = 1.
b1 : 1 =
spectral filter
wheel actual
position = 2.
b2 : = MSB
for SID >
255cm.
b3 : = not
used.
b4 : 1 =iris
b0 : = not used. diaphragm
b0 : 1 = the
b1 : = not used. stepper
collimator is
b2 : = not used. motor is
rebooting.
b3 : = not used. moving.
b1 : = not used. MSB LSB MSB LSB
b4 : = not used. b5 : 1
b2 : = not used. Actual Actual Actual Actual
Rx_Stat b5 : 1 = the collimator is at 0°. =spectral LSB SID Status Message that retrieves information
0x7F0 8 0 b3 : = not used. Vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical 2.06
us b6 : 0 = the collimator operates in filter wheel Value as per described in detail.

b4 : = not used. Cross Cross Long Long
manual mode. stepper
b5 : = not used. Value Value Value Value
b6 : 1 = the collimator operates in motor is
b6 : 1 = LIGHT
automatic or in ExpHold mode. moving.
switched ON.
b7 : 1 = proximity sensor is b6 : 1 = cross
b7 := not used.
enabled. shutter
stepper
motor is
moving.
b7 : 1 = long
shutter
stepper
motor is
moving.
Note : if both
b0 and b1 =
1, the
spectral filter
wheel actual
position is 3.
Actual LSB MSB
Rx_Stat Actual Inclination Spectral _Lateral _Lateral Status Message that retrieves information
0x7F1 8 0 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 2.05
us Value [-128;+127°] Filter Wheel SID SID as per described in detail.
Position [0;3] Value Value
Status Message that retrieves the actual
Rx_Stat X-Ray Collimator Serial Number Set.
0x7F2 8 0 0x53 0x2F 0x4E MSB_SN CSB_SN CSB_SN CSB_SN LSB_SN 1.00
us Note : the first 3 digits are constant (0x53
0x2F 0x43 = S/N)
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 = left button
pressed.
b1 : 1 = right button
pressed.
If enabled, this status Message retrieves
b2 : 1 = down button
the actual status of buttons installed on
pressed.
the X-Ray Collimator Front Panel.
Rx_Stat b3 : 1 = up button
0x7F4 1 0 If button not pressed : Message retrieved 2.15
us pressed.
each 1s.
b4 : 1 = left rotation
If button pressed : Message retrieved
button pressed.
each 80ms.
b5 : 1 = right rotation
button pressed.
b6 : = not used.
b7 := not used.
EV_POWER_ON : Event message
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x01 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 retrieved from the collimator at the power 2.15
nt
on.
EV_MOT_STARTED : Event message
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x02 StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 retrieved from the collimator when the 2.15
nt
selected motor starts its movement.

EV_MOT_STOPPED : Event message
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x03 StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 retrieved from the collimator when the 2.15
nt
selected motor stops its movement.
EV_DSC_STARTED : Event message
Rx_Eve retrieved from the collimator when both
0x7F4 8 0 0x04 StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
nt the selected motor and the corresponding
knob start their movement.
EV_DSC_STOPPED : Event message
Rx_Eve retrieved from the collimator when both
nt the selected motor and the corresponding
knob stop their movement.
EV_DONE : Event message retrieved
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x06 StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 from the collimator when the selected 2.15
nt
motor complete its movement.
EV_INFO : Event message retrieved from
the collimator when its temperature value
Rx_Eve MSB_Te CSB_Te CSB_Te LSB_Te
0x7F4 8 0 0x07 0x00 AlarmTemp 0x00 is again in eligible range of values. 2.15
nt mp mp mp mp
MSB_Temp,LSB_Temp = Actual X-Ray
Collimator Temperature Value.
EV_INFO : Event message retrieved from
Rx_Eve AlarmLedPC
0x7F4 8 0 0x07 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 the collimator when the LED board is 2.15
nt B
restored after a fault.
EV_LIGHT : Event message retrieved
from the collimator when its light status
changes.
Rx_Eve MSB_Lig CSB_Lig CSB_Lig LSB_Ligh
0x7F4 8 0 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 MSB_LightStatus,LSB_LightStatus = 2.15
nt htStatus htStatus htStatus tStatus
Actual X-Ray Collimator Light Status:
0x00 = Light OFF
0x01 : Light ON
FW
Ver.
EV_CANBUS : Event message retrieved
from the collimator when the CAN Bus
status changes on the selected channel.
Rx_Eve CanBusStatu ChNumber = Channel Number related to
0x7F4 8 0 0x09 ChNumber 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
nt s the EV_CANBUS
CanBusStatus = 0x01 = BusOff
CanBusStatus = 0x01 = BusOff Recovery
CanBusStatus = 0x01 = Can Bus Passive
EV_INIT_START : Event message
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x0A 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 retrieved from the collimator when it starts 2.15
nt
its initialization.
EV_MASTER_READY : Event message
Rx_Eve retrieved from the collimator when it
0x7F4 8 0 0x0B 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 2.15
nt finishes its initialization and it is in ready
status.
EV_CHIAVE : Event message retrieved
from the collimator when its key status
changes.
Rx_Eve MSB_Ke CSB_Key CSB_Key LSB_Key
0x7F4 8 0 0x0C 0x00 0x00 0x00 MSB_KeyStatus,LSB_KeyStatus = Actual 2.15
nt yStatus Status Status Status

X-Ray Collimator Key Status:
0x00 = Automatic
0x01 : Manual
EV_FILTER_READY : Event message
retrieved from the collimator when its
spectral filter wheel changes its position.
StepperMotorNr = number of the stepper
Rx_Eve MSB_Filt CSB_Filt CSB_Filt LSB_Filte
0x7F4 8 0 0x0D StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 motor connected to the spectral filter 2.15
nt erPos erPos erPos rPos
wheel.
MSB_FilterPos,LSB_FilterPos = Actual X-
Ray Collimator Spectral Filter Wheel
Position [0;3]
EV_FILTER_READY : Event message
retrieved from the collimator when the
selected shutter complete its opening
movement in order to indicate the number
of steps missed for obscuring the optical
Rx_Eve MSB_Ste CSB_Ste CSB_Ste LSB_Ste fork.
0x7F4 8 0 0x0E StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 2.15
nt psNr psNr psNr psNr StepperMotorNr = number of the stepper
motor that has completed its opening
motion.
MSB_StepsNr,LSB_StepsNr = number of
missing steps for obscuring the optical
fork.
FW
Ver.
EV_POTENZIOMETRO : Event message
retrieved from the collimator that contains
the actual analogic value of the
potentiometer connected to the indicated
MSB_An CSB_An CSB_An LSB_Ana stepper motor.
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x0F StepperMotorNr 0x00 0x00 alogicPot alogicPot alogicPot logicPotV StepperMotorNr = number of the stepper 2.15
nt
Value Value Value alue motor.
MSB_AnalogicPotValue,LSB_AnalogicPot
Value = analogic value of the
potentiometer connected to
StepperMotorNr.
EV_TASTO_FRONTALE : Event message
retrieved from the collimator that contains
the actual status value of the indicated
front panel button.
FrontButtonNr = number of the front panel
button pressed.
FrontButtonNr = 0x01 : LIGHT front panel
button.
MSB_But CSB_But CSB_But LSB_Butt FrontButtonNr = 0x01 : SPECTRAL
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x10 FrontButtonNr 0x00 0x00 tonStatus tonStatus tonStatus onStatus FILTER WHEEL front panel button. 2.15
nt
Value Value Value Value MSB_ButtonStatusValue,LSB_ButtonStat
usValue = STATUS value of the front
panel button pressed.
MSB_ButtonStatusValue,LSB_ButtonStat
usValue = 0x00 : Front Panel Button
Released.
MSB_ButtonStatusValue,LSB_ButtonStat
usValue = 0x01 : Front Panel Button
Pressed.
EV_ERROR : Error message retrieved
from the collimator when it receives a
movement value for the stepper motor
indicated out of its eligible range of values.
MSB_Wr CSB_Wr CSB_Wr LSB_Wro
Rx_Eve StepperMotorNr = stepper motor number
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 StepperMotorNr 0x01 0x00 ongPosV ongPosV ongPosV ngPosVal 2.15
nt for which the collimator has received a
alue alue alue ue
value out of the eligible range.
MSB_WrongPosValue,LSB_WrongPosVal
ue = wrong position value received by the
collimator for the selected stepper motor.
from the collimator that contains the
number of attempts performed by the
spectral filter wheel in order to reach the
MSB_Att CSB_Att CSB_Att LSB_Atte requested position.
Rx_Eve emptsFilt emptsFilt emptsFilt mptsFilte StepperMotorNr = stepper motor number
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 StepperMotorNr 0x02 0x00 2.15
nt erPositio erPositio erPositio rPositioni related to the spectral filter wheel.
ning ning ning ng MSB_AttemptsFilterPositioning,LSB_Atte
mptsFilterPositioning = number of
attempts performed by the spectral filter
wheel in order to reach the requested
position.
FW
Ver.
from the collimator when its actual
MSB_Act CSB_Act CSB_Act LSB_Act temperature is higher than the maximum
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x03 0x00 ualTemp ualTemp ualTemp ualTemp threshold value. 2.15
nt
Value Value Value Value MSB_ActualTempValue,LSB_ActualTemp
Value = actual X-Ray Collimator
temperature value.
from the collimator when its actual
MSB_Act CSB_Act CSB_Act LSB_Act temperature is lower than the maximum
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x04 0x00 ualTemp ualTemp ualTemp ualTemp threshold value. 2.15
nt
Value Value Value Value MSB_ActualTempValue,LSB_ActualTemp
Value = actual X-Ray Collimator
temperature value.
from the collimator when the external
board received a message from the
Rx_Eve indicated stepper motor later than the
nt timeout set.
StepperMotorNr = stepper motor number
that sends messages to the external

board later than the timeout set.
difference between the actual value
retrieved by the potentiometer connected
to the selected stepper motor and its
MSB_Del CSB_Del CSB_Del LSB_Delt theoretical value.
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 StepperMotorNr 0x06 0x00 taPotValu taPotValu taPotValu aPotValu StepperMotorNr = stepper motor number 2.15
nt
e e e e connected to the potentiometer.
MSB_DeltaPotValue,LSB_DeltaPotValue
= difference between the actual value
theoretical value.
from the collimator if the indicated stepper
motor generates a timeout error during the
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 StepperMotorNr 0x07 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 X-Ray Collimator boot-up procedure. 2.15
nt
StepperMotorNr = number of the first
stepper motor that generates a timeout
error at the boot up.
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x08 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 from the collimator that indicated that a 2.15
nt
general failure error occurred.
FW
Ver.
difference between the actual value
theoretical value while performing its
MSB_Del CSB_Del CSB_Del LSB_Delt calibration.
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 StepperMotorNr 0x09 0x00 taPotValu taPotValu taPotValu aPotValu StepperMotorNr = stepper motor number 2.15
nt
e e e e connected to the potentiometer.
MSB_DeltaPotValue,LSB_DeltaPotValue
= difference between the actual value
theoretical value while performing its
calibration.
from the collimator that contains the error
code generated by the LED PCB.
LEDPCBErrorCode = Error Code
generated by the LED PCB.
LEDPCBErrorCode = 0x00 :
LAMP_ALARM_NONE
LAMP_ALARM_OUT_ZERO
LAMP_ALARM_LED_SCOLL
LEDPCBErrorCode = 0x03
MSB_LE CSB_LE CSB_LE LSB_LE :LAMP_ALARM_KEY_PRESSED
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x0A 0x00 DPCBErr DPCBErr DPCBErr DPCBErr LEDPCBErrorCode = 0x04 : 2.15
nt
orCode orCode orCode orCode LAMP_ALARM_INT_TEMP
LAMP_ALARM_EXT_TEMP
LAMP_ALARM_SHUT_OFF_INT
LAMP_ALARM_SHUT_OFF_EXT
LEDPCBErrorCode = 0x0A :
LAMP_ALARM_ERROR
LAMP_ALARM_ERROR_DIAG_0
LAMP_ALARM_ERROR_DIAG_1
FW
Ver.
code generated by the PCB Data Flash
Memory.
MemoryErrorCode = Error Code
MSB_Me CSB_Me CSB_Me LSB_Me generated by the PCB Data Flash
Rx_Eve
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x0B 0x00 moryErro moryErro moryErro moryErro Memory. 2.15
nt
rCode rCode rCode rCode MemoryErrorCode = 0x00 :
MEM_ERR_CALIBR
MemoryErrorCode = 0x01 :
MEM_ERR_SN
MemoryErrorCode = 0x02 :
MEM_ERR_CONFIG
code generated by the indicated CAN
FiFo while it is in OverRun status.
CANFiFoOverRunNr = CAN FiFo that
MSB_CA CSB_CA CSB_CA LSB_CA
Rx_Eve generates the OverRun error.
0x7F4 8 0 0x40 0x00 0x0C 0x00 NFiFoOv NFiFoOv NFiFoOv NFiFoOv 2.15
nt CANFiFoOverRunNr = 0x00 : Command
erRun erRunNr erRunNr erRunNr

Message CAN FiFo
CANFiFoOverRunNr = 0x01 :
Configuration Message CAN FiFo
CANFiFoOverRunNr = 0x02 : Remote
Message CAN FiFo
Status Message that retrieves Cross and
Rx_Stat MSB_LongP LSB_LongP
0x7F5 8 0 MSB_CrossPotValue LSB_CrossPotValue Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Long actual potentiometer value at the 2.15
us otValue otValue
output frequency set in configuration.
If D0 =
D0 = 0x01 - Actual If D0 = 0x01 If D0 = 0x01 0x01 Status Message that retrieves information
Rx_Stat If D0 = 0x01
0x7F7 8 0 Inclinometer Axes LSB_X axis MSB_Y axis LSB_Y Not Used Not Used Not Used as per described in detail at the output 2.20
us MSB_X axis value
Values value value axis frequency set in configuration.
value
Acknowledge Message that contains the
same data as per sent by means 0x7A3
Rx_Ack
Command Message.
nowledg 0x7F8 8 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1.00
Note : such message is retrieved only if
e
enabled with the 0x600 sub 0x53
configuration message.
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 =
2mm b0 : 1 =
Filter Error
Width while
Selected. updating
b1 : 1 = the Flash
Vertical Memory
b0 : 1 = b0 : 1 =
CAN or with
Cross ShutterDifferential
ATS Configura
Configured. Vertical SID
receptor tion
b1 : 1 = Longactive.
enabled. Values.
Shutter b1 : 1 =
b2 : 1 = b1 : 1 =
b0 : 1 = LIGHT b0 : 1 = The collimator operated Configured. Vertical
Right Flash
switched ON. in Manual mode. (Yellow Front b2 : 1 = IrisReceptor
Side Memory
b1 : = not used. Panel LED switched ON) Diaphragm Bucky
CAN or restored
b2 : = not used. b1 : 1 = The collimator is NOT Configured. active.
ATS to its
b3 : = not used. operational. (Red Front Panel b3 : 1 = b2 : 1 =
receptor default
b4 : = not used. LED switched ON) Spectral Right Side
enabled. configura
b5 : 1 = The b2 : 1 = The collimator operated Filter Wheel Receptor MSB Iris LSB Iris
b3 : 1 = tion
collimator operated in Automatic mode. (Green Front Configured. Bucky Diaphrag Diaphrag Status Message that retrieves information
Rx_Stat Left Side values.
0x7F9 8 0 in Automatic or in Panel LED switched ON) b4 : 1 = active. m m as per described in detail at the output 1.15
us CAN or b2 : 1 =
Manual mode (front b3 : 1 = The key is turned such Vertical Fixed
b3 : 1 = Left Opening Opening frequency set.
ATS Flash
panel red LED that the collimator operates in SID Selected.Side Value Value
receptor Memory
switched OFF). Manual mode. (Yellow Front Receptor
enabled. updated
b6 : = not used. Panel LED switched ON) b5 : 1 = Bucky
b4 : 1 = with the
b7 : 1 = at lease one b4 : = not used. English active.
Left Side new
shutter (Cross or b5 : = not used. Language b4 : = not
CAN SID configura
Long) is totally b6 : = not used. active. used.
enabled. tion
closed. b7 := not used. b6 : = not b5 : = not
b5 : 1 = values.
used. used.
Right b3 : = not
b7 : 1 = b6 : = not
Side used.
Imperial used.
CAN SID b4 : = not
Measurement b7 := not
enabled. used.
Unit active. used.
b6 : 1 = b5 : = not
SID value used.
visualize b6 : = not
d on used.
LCD. b7 := not
b7 := not used.
used.
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 =
Optical
Fork
Obscured
while
Cross
Shutter is
totally
closed.
b1 : 1 =
Optical
Fork
Obscured
while
Long
Shutter is
totally
closed.
b2 : 1 =
Spectral
MSB LSB
Filter
Actual Actual
MSB Actual LSB Actual Wheel
Spectral Spectral
Long Long Optical
Filter Filter
MSB Actual Cross Opening Opening Fork
LSB Actual Cross Opening Value Wheel Wheel Status Message that retrieves information
Rx_Stat Opening Value Value Value Obscured
0x7FC 8 0 (measurement unit : number of Position Position Not Used as per described in detail at the output 1.00
us (measurement unit : (measureme (measureme .
steps) Value Value frequency set.
number of steps) nt unit : nt unit : b3 : 1 =
(measure (measure
number of number of Optical
ment unit ment unit
steps) steps) Fork
: number : number
Obscured
of steps) of steps)
while
Cross
Shutter is
totally
opened.
b4 : 1 =
Optical
Fork
Obscured
while
Long
Shutter is
totally
opened.
b5 : = not
used.
b6 : = not
used.
b7 := not
used.
FW
Ver.
D0 = 0x01 - LCD
Display Visualization
Type Standard
Tx_Disp D0 = 0x01 - LCD
Configuration Message to set-up the LCD
layConfi 0x7C0 8 0 Display Visualization Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used 1.00
Display Visualization Type.
g Type Sedecal
D0 = 0x01 - LCD
Display Visualization
Type Free
Configuration Message to set-up the LCD
Display Message.
Tx_Disp Note : such configuration is possible only
layConfi 0x7C1 8 0 Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data if the LCD Visualization Type is configured 1.00
g as Free by means the 0x7C0 subD1
message. See Quick Start Guide for an
example of LCD Configuration esample.
b0 : 1 = Ready relay
Output activation
required
b1 : 1 = ExpHold
relay Output
activation required
b2 : 1 = Manual
relay Output
activation required.
Status Message that retrieves information
Rx_Stat b3 : 1 = Closed
0x7D0 2 0 Not Used as per described in detail at the output 1.00
us Shutters relay Output
frequency set.
b4 : 1 = X-Ray relay
Output activation
required.
b5 : 1 = internal use.
b7 : 1 = The
Collimator is Booting
Up.
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 =
lsb_Number
of
Consecutive
Spectral
Filter
Positioning
Attempts.
b1 : 1 =
msb_Number
of
Consecutive
Spectral
Output activation
Filter
required
Positioning
b1 : 1 = ExpHold
Attempts. Total
relay Output Total Total
b2 : = not Total Number
activation required Number Number
used. Number of of Alarms
b2 : 1 = Manual of Alarms of Alarms
b3 : 1 = Alarms generate
relay Output generate generate Status Message that retrieves information
Cross or generated d for the
activation required. d for the d for the as per described in detail at the output
Long Shutter for the Iris

Rx_Stat b3 : 1 = Closed Cross Long frequency set.
0x7D0 8 0 Not Used Reset Alarm. Spectral Diaphrag Not Used 1.00
us Shutters relay Output Shutter Shutter Note : such message is retrieved only if
b4 : 1 = Iris Filter Wheel m from
activation required. from the from the configured with the 0x600 sub 0x33
Diaphragm from the X- the X-
b4 : 1 = X-Ray relay X-Ray X-Ray Configuration Message.
Alarm. Ray Ray
Output activation Collimato Collimato
(Wrong Collimator Collimato
required. r Power r Power
Positioning) Power ON. r Power
b5 : 1 = internal use. ON. ON.
b5 : 1 = Long ON.
Shutter
b7 : 1 = The
Alarm.
(Wrong
Up.
Positioning)
b6 : 1 =
Cross Shutter
Alarm.
(Wrong
Positioning)
b7 : 1 =
Spectral
Filter Wheel
Alarm.
(Wrong
Positioning)
FW
Ver.
Output activation
required
b1 : 1 = ExpHold
relay Output
activation required
b2 : 1 = Manual
relay Output
Status Message that retrieves information
Rx_Stat b3 : 1 = Closed
0x100 2 0 Not Used as per described in detail at the output 1.00
us Shutters relay Output
frequency set.
b4 : 1 = X-Ray relay
Output activation
required.
b7 : 1 = The
Up.
FW
Ver.
b0 : 1 =
lsb_Number
of
Consecutive
Spectral
Filter
Positioning
Attempts.
b1 : 1 =
msb_Number
of
Consecutive
Spectral
Output activation
Filter
required
Positioning
b1 : 1 = ExpHold
Attempts. Total
relay Output Total Total
b2 : = not Total Number
activation required Number Number
used. Number of of Alarms
b2 : 1 = Manual of Alarms of Alarms
b3 : 1 = Alarms generate
relay Output generate generate Status Message that retrieves information
Cross or generated d for the
activation required. d for the d for the as per described in detail at the output
Long Shutter for the Iris

Rx_Stat b3 : 1 = Closed Cross Long frequency set.
0x100 8 0 Not Used Reset Alarm. Spectral Diaphrag Not Used 2.04
us Shutters relay Output Shutter Shutter Note : such message is retrieved only if
b4 : 1 = Iris Filter Wheel m from
activation required. from the from the configured with the 0x600 sub 0x33
Diaphragm from the X- the X-
b4 : 1 = X-Ray relay X-Ray X-Ray Configuration Message.
Alarm. Ray Ray
Output activation Collimato Collimato
(Wrong Collimator Collimato
required. r Power r Power
Positioning) Power ON. r Power
b5 : 1 = internal use. ON. ON.
b5 : 1 = Long ON.
Shutter
b7 : 1 = The
Alarm.
(Wrong
Up.
Positioning)
b6 : 1 =
Cross Shutter
Alarm.
(Wrong
Positioning)
b7 : 1 =
Spectral
Filter Wheel
Alarm.
(Wrong
Positioning)
CAN BUS MESSAGES - COLLIMATOR COMMUNICATION

Description
This collimator features an open communication CanBus connected to board RSR008.
CanBus messages used by the collimator are described in this Chapter CAN BUS MESSAGES -
COLLIMATOR CONFIGURATION; the addresses not taken by the following messages may be used
by other communications nodes without interfering with normal collimator operation.
NOTE
COLLIMATOR CANBUS COMMUNICATION SPEED IS SET AT 500 KBIT/S
QUICK START
SID, Cross, Long Values
SID, Cross and Long values are set by sending message 7A0 via CanBus.
Regulate:
• SID at 100 cm
• Cross at 430 mm
• Long at 130 mm
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Can Bus Messages - Collimator Communication
A message of the following type must be sent via CanBus:
ID DLC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
7A0 8 40 00 00 64 01 AE 00 82
length automatic SID values set at 100 Cross value set at 430 Long value set at 130
mode cm mm mm
Setting of Automatic/Manual Mode

To set the collimator operating mode, message 7A0 must be sent via CanBus. A Cross/Long/
SID value must be entered:
• SID at 100 cm
• Cross at 430 mm
• Long at 130 mm
A message of the following type must be sent via CanBus to enable the automatic mode:
7A0 8 40 00 00 64 01 AE 00 82
length automatic SID values set at 100 Cross value set at 430 Long value set at 130
mode cm mm mm
A message of the following type must be sent via CanBus to enable the manual mode:
7A0 8 80 00 00 64 01 AE 00 82
length manual SID values set at 100 Cross value set at 430 Long value set at 130
mode cm mm mm
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS CAN BUS MESSAGES - COLLIMATOR COMMUNICATION
Status Messages
The status messages feature must be activated to received collimator status data. To do this,
set the time value in milliseconds of the message return frequency.
Status messages are activated with two messages:
• 7A7 - enables message transmission; 7F0 (SID, Cross, Long status and position); 7F1 (Fil-
ter and Flag)
To enable status messages 7F0 and 7F1 with a frequency of 100 ms.
7A7 8 00 64 00 00 00 00 00 00
length Time in milliseconds
Cross/Long
Once a movement message is sent, the status messages provide data related to collimator
movement, current position and possible movement errors.
Status message 7F0 give the current Cross/Long value.
ID D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
7F0 FLAGS xx yy zz CrossH CrossL LongH LongL
Byte Cross position Byte Long position
Cross = (CrossH<<8) + CrossL

Long = (LongH<<8) + LongL
When the device is moving, bit0 (with a value of D0) is set at 1. To detect errors during
movement, the D1 value of status message 7F9 must be analysed.
Messages are detailed with specific descriptions in this Chapter.
CONTROL MESSAGES
“Control” messages are sent to RSR008 by the external board ASR003 and may be used by
the outside control system via CanBus when ASR003 board is lacking.
0x7A0
This is a particular message, in fact it may takes on two different meanings,

DLC equal to 8 or 2, 6.
ID TYPE DLC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
0x7A0 Input for RSR008 8
This message is programmable in configuration phase or may be positioned in

address differ from the standard.
DLC=8
D0
b7 If 1: Collimator manual control (applicable to R225 ACS and R225/006/ACS protocol)
b6 If 1: Collimator automatic control (applicable to R225/006/ACS protocol)
b5 If 1: Cross closed
b4 If 1: Cross open
b3 If 1: Long closed
b2 If 1: Long open
b1 if 1: Iris closed (if assembled)
b0 If 0: Iris open (if assembled)
D1
b7 If 1: Disable temporarily the format limits (the value not Flash stored), applicable to R 225 ACS protocol
If 1: Filter position 2 (if bit 5 used inserts filter position 3), applicable to R 225/006/ACS protocol
b6 Not used
b5 If 1: Filter position 1 (if bit 7 used inserts filter position 3)
b4 If 0: In square field moves Iris to maximum aperture (62cm)

If 1: In square field moves Iris to indicated aperture by 7A3 sub-control. 0x0A
b3 If 1: Ignores formats (SID and dimensions)

b2 If 0: Radiology (square-field)
If 1: Fluoroscopy (round-field, if assembled)
b1 If 1: Filter change
applicable to R 225 ACS and R 225/170/ACS protocol)
b0 R 225 ACS:
1: Inverts the light status
0: Light status unchanged
R 225/170/ACS:
1: Light ON
0: Light status unchanged
GMM:
1: Light ON
0: Light OFF
D2 ...D7
Are not bit defined but byte defined
0x7A0
D2 bit 7: not used

bit 6: MSbit for SID > 255
bit 5: bit1 not used
D3 Vertical SID in cm
D4 MSB vertical Cross format in mm or Iris if in Fluoroscopy
D5 LSB vertical Cross format in mm or Iris if in Fluoroscopy
D6 MSB vertical Long format in mm
D7 LSB vertical Long format in mm
DLC=2
The message is used to send values of Cross and Long inclination.
0x7A0
D0 Cross inclination (0-70°)
D1 Long inclination (0-70°)
DLC=6
The message is used to send various controls.
0x7A0 IRIS movement
D0 0x01 control: runs IRIS
D1 MSB IRIS format

D2 LSB IRIS format
D3 not used
D4 not used
D5 not used
0x7A1
This message transmits the data related to lateral left and right formats externally
from the collimator to board RSR008.
ID Type DLC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
0x7A1
D0 MSB left Cross format in mm
D1 LSB left Cross format in mm
D2 MSB left Long format in mm
D3 LSB left Long format in mm
D4 MSB right Cross format in mm
D5 LSB right Cross format in mm
D6 MSB right Long format in mm
D7 LSB right Long format in mm
0x7A2
This message transmits the data related to lateral SID externally from the
collimator to board RSR008.
0x7A2
D0 LSB lateral SID in cm
D1 MSB lateral SID in cm
D2..D7 Not used
0x7A3
This message allows different operations to be performed

Each sent message has a reply on 0x7F8 (if configured). This message contains the same
transmitted data as 0x7A3.
NOTE: Se D1 is not recognized, D1= 0xFF is transmitted in the message 0x7F8. If the values
are not recognized in D2, this byte takes on the current value in the message 0x7F8.
Byte D0 may assume the following values:

• 01h: Filter change, in this case byte D1 transmits filter position information (00h...03h)
• 02h: Requires the serial number to be transmitted via CanBus (see 0x7F2 message)
• 03h: Shows a request of change to lamp status: If Lamp is ON it will be switched OFF; If it
is OFF it will be switched ON
• 04h: Shows a request to switch ON LED on RSR008 board
• 05h: Shows a request to switch OFF the LED on RSR008 board
• 06h: Modifies speed during automatic movement for format values:
D1: MSB motor frequency (min. 500, max. 6000)
D2: LSB motor frequency
• 07h: Modifies manual movement speed for shutters
D1: MSB motor frequency (min. 500, max. 6000)
D2: LSB motor frequency
• 08h: Light ON/OFF control
D1= 1 - ON
D1= 0 - OFF
• 09h: Inclinometer temporary disabled

D1= 1 - Inclinometer disabled (collimator always in vertical)
D1= 0 - Inclinometer enabled (Only if Inclinometer has been previously enabled in
configuration)
• 0Ah: Maximum Iris Field
D1, D2 = H,L - Maximum size in mm
• 0Bh: Type of shutter displacement with open/closed bit, msg 0x7A0
D1= 1: Shutter displacement with fixed frequency (sub message 0x7A0)
D1= 2: Fixed shutter displacement in mm/sec. Shutter speed is fixed although SID varies.
• 0Ch: Shutter speed with open/closed bit, msg 0x7A0
D1 = 0: STEPPER_CROSS - 1: STEPPER_LONG
D2, D3 = H, L - speed in mm/sec (100 mm/sec default), min. = 10 mm/sec, max. = 500
mm/sec. Speed of projected movement is constant although SID changed.
• 0Dh: Enable/Disable Knobs on front panel
D1 = 0: Knobs disabled
D1 = 1: Knobs enabled
• 0Eh: Enable/Disable Filter push button on front panel
D1 = 0: Push button disabled
D1 = 1: Push button enabled
• 0Fh: Enable/Disable Light push button on front panel
• 10h: Enable/Disable Iris
D1 = 0: Iris disabled
D1 = 1: Iris enabled
D2 = 0: Temporary setting
D2 = 1: Flash stored
• 11h: Independent Iris setting
D1 = 0: Iris varies depending on shutters
D1 = 1: Independent Iris control
D2 = 0: Temporary setting
• 12h: Enable/Disable Iris push-buttons on front panel
• 13h: Light ON Time for buttons and CAN bus controls
D1 = Light ON Time (from 5 to 60 sec.)
D2 = 0: Temporary setting,
• 14h: Light ON for defined time
D1 = Light ON time (from 1 to 60 sec.), if 0 Light OFF
• FDh: Collimator simulation of inclination

D1 = 0: Simulation disabled
D1 = 1: Simulation enabled
D2 = 0: ERROR
D2 = 1: VERTICAL
D2 = 2: LEFT
D2 = 3: RIGHT
• FEh: COLLIMATOR RESET. D1=0x55 - Collimator Reset (complete restart)
• 15h: Configuration of TFR Visualisation
D1 = Sub-command
0x01: X-Ray icon
D2= 0x00 - OFF
D2=0x01 - ON
0x2: SID icon
D2= 0x00 - Under table
D2= 0x01 - Above table
D2= 0x02 - Outside of table (no angles and FREE Exposure is blinking)
0x03: Angle Column
D2= Angle Column - values -99 to +99, SINT8 format
Note: If D1 is not recognized, D1 = 0xFF is transmitted in the message 0x7F8.
If the values are not recognized in D2, this byte takes on the current value in the message
0x7F8.
0x7A4
The message is used to send automatic/manual control to RSR008 board
0x7A4
D0 Bit defined
b7 If 1: collimator request of manual control
b6 If 1: collimator request of automatic control
b5..b0 bit non utilizzati
D1...D7 Byte non utilizzati
0x7A5
Message used to send SID value to the collimator, without changing the square field size.
0x7A5 Input for RSR008 8 LSB MSB
D0, D1 (LSB, MSB): Shows the present SID value in cm. The value must be between the min.
and max. values selected in the collimator configuration phase.
0x7A6
This message serves to know the hardware/software version of board RSR008.
0x7A6 Remote 8
Board RSR008 responds with string

"R225S200"
Which stands for:
Collimator 225 firmware 2.00
0x7A7
This message serves to program the transmission time of “Status” type messages with
address 0x7F0, 0x7F1, 0x7F9 and 0x7FC by board RSR008 board.
0x7A7
D0 MSB transmission time 0x7F0 messages in msec (default = 0)
D1 LSB transmission time 0x7F0 messages in msec

D6 MSB transmission time 0x7FC messages in msec(default = 0)
D7 LSB transmission time 0x7FC messages in msec
If the set time is less than 100 msec, the messages will be sent once only. If the value is the
same or greater, the messages will be repeated at a value equal to the set time value.
0x7A8
The message is used to send to control the maximum Cross and Long apertures.
0x7A8
D0..D1 Set value in mm, maximum Cross opening (MSB, LSB) (default = 430)
D2..D3 Set value in mm, maximum Long opening (MSB, LSB) (default = 430)
D4..D5 Set value in mm, minimum Cross opening (MSB, LSB) (default = 0)(*)
D6..D7 Set value in mm, minimum Cros opening (MSB, LSB)(default = 0)(*)
These values indicate maximum and minimum available opening of the square field.
The message does not modify values stored in Flash memory during a configuration phase;
the values are lost on the collimator power down and must be re-sent at subsequent power-up.
(*) Min. formats are considered only if previously enabled in configuration.
0x7A9
This message allows to program light source ON.
0x7A9
D0 Lamp Timer setting in seconds (5 to 60 seconds)(default = 30)
D1..D7 Not used
0x7AA
This message is used by the external board ASR003 to send, to board RSR008,status
messages related to digital inputs present on the external board.
0x7AA
D0 Bit defined
b0: Presence of full size lateral left
b1: Right lateral cassette
b2: Full size lateral right
b3: Open Long
b4: Close Long
b5: Open Cross
b6: Close Cross
b7: Open Iris
D1 Bit defined
b0-b6: Not used
b7: Presence of lateral left cassette
D2 Bit defined
b0:
b1:
b2: Fixed format #5
b3: Fixed format #4
b4: Fixed format #3
b5: Fixed format #2
b6: Fixed format #1
b7: 0 = Radiography, 1 = Fluoroscopy
D3 Bit defined
b0: Close iris
b1: Filter position 1
b2: Not used
b3: SID lateral position 1

D4 Bit defined
b0: Not used
b3: SID lateral full size 1
b4: SID lateral full size 2
b5: Not used
b6: Temporary exclusion inclinometer
b7: Not used
D5 Bit defined
b0: Not used
b1: Not used
b2: Not used
b4: ON/OFF light source switch
b5- b7: Not used
D6 Bit defined
b0 - b3: Not used
b4: Calibration request
b5 - b7: Not used
D7 Bit defined
b0 - b2: Not used
b3: Tomography
b4: Request Manual mode
b5-b6: Not used
b7: Table cassette in
0x7AB
This message is used by the external board ASR003 to send, to board RSR008, the voltage
value of potentiometer measurement related to SID and vertical cassettes.
0x7AB Input for RSR008 8
0x7AB
D0 MSB voltage value of stand potentiometer
D1 LSB voltage value of stand potentiometer
D2 MSB voltage value of table potentiometer
D3 LSB voltage value of table potentiometer
D4 MSB voltage value of table bucky Cross potentiometer
D5 LSB voltage value of table bucky Cross potentiometer
D6 MSB voltage value of table bucky Long potentiometer
D7 LSB voltage value of table bucky Long potentiometer
0x7AC
Message is used by the external board ASR003 to send, to board RSR008, the voltage value
of potentiometer measurement related to lateral left and right cassettes.
0x7AC Input for RSR008 8
0x7AC
D0 MSB voltage value of the left bucky Cross potentiometer
D1 LSB voltage value of the left bucky Cross potentiometer
D2 MSB voltage value of the left bucky Long potentiometer
D3 LSB voltage value of the left bucky Long potentiometer
D4 MSB voltage value of the right bucky Cross potentiometer
D5 LSB voltage value of the right bucky Cross potentiometer
D6 MSB voltage value of the right bucky Long potentiometer
D7 LSB voltage value of the right bucky Long potentiometer
0x7AD
Message to configure some operation variable without having to resort to configure.
0x7AD Input for RSR008 8
0x7AD
D0 Bit defined
b7: If 1, sub-control on D1 is used
b6: Not used
b5: If 1 indicates Long side SID correction (value in byte D3)
b4: If 1 indicates Cross side SID correction (value in byte D2)
b3: If 1 sets inches as unit of measurement
b2: If 1 indicates cm as unit of measurement
b1: If 1 indicates the use of Italian
b0: If 1 indicates the use of English
D1 Sub-control if D0b7 = 1
D2 Correction for Cross:

If correction is set in cm for SID:
correction from -25 to +25 cm
If correction is set in % for format:
Percentage correction for Cross:
-10.0%, +10,0%
eg.:40= 4,0%, -15%= -1.5%
D3 Correction for Long:

If correction is set in cm for SID:
correction in cm from -25 cm to +25 cm
If correction is set in % for format:
Percentage correction for Long:
-10.0%, +10,0%
eg.:40= 4,0%, -15%= -1.5%
D4 Not used
D5 Not used
D6 Not used
D7 Not used
D1: 0x01 - Enable/Disable Iris

D2: 0x00=Disable Iris - 0x01 Enable Iris
D3: 0x00=Temporary - 0x01=Flahs stored
0x7AE
Message used to transmit information, related to the software version of the external board to
RSR008 for display viewing.
0x7AF
Used exactly the same way as 0x600 in configuration. It serves to change different parameters
during normal collimator operation.
Note:
Remember to save data through control 7Af 8 0x64 0x01.
After saving data, the collimator must be switched OFF and ON again or re-set through control
0x7Af 8 0xFE 0x55.
STATUS MESSAGES
“Status” type messages are the messages generated by board RSR008 to relay information
related to collimator status.
0x7F0
This message may be sent by board RSR008 after having programmed the transmission time.
R225/006/ACS protocol: The message is sent automatically every 1000 ms without having to
enter the activation control (0x7A7).
0x7F0 Output for RSR008 8
D0 and D1 byte are bit defined
D0
b7 Not used
b6 If 1: Light source is ON
b5 Not used
b4 Not used
b3 Not used
b2 Not used
b1 Not used
b0 If 1: Collimator is in the initial reset mode
D1
b7 If 1: Photosensor is activated
if 0: Photosensor is de-activated or disabled during configuration
b6 If 1: Collimator in the manual mode

If 0: Collimator in the automatic mode or in the ExpHold
b5 If 1: Switch is activated if the collimator position is 0°
b4 Not used
b3 Not used
b2 Not used
b1 Not used
b0 Not used
D2
b7 If 1: The Long field motor is moving
b6 If 1: The Cross field motor is moving
b5 If 1: The Filter motor is running
b4 If 1: Iris field motor is running
b3 Not used
b2 Msbit for SID > 255
b1 Filter in position 2
b0 Filter in position 1
(perfiltroposizione3inseritoavremob1eb0attivia1)
The following data are byte programmed:
0x7F0
D3 Vertical SID in cm
D4 MSB vertical Cross format in mm
D5 LSB vertical Cross format in mm
D6 MSB vertical Long format in mm
D7 LSB vertical Long format in mm
0x7F1
This message may be sent by board RSR008 after having programmed transmission time.
0x7F1
D0 Inclination (from -128 to +127)
D1 Not used
D2 Not used
D3 Present filter selection (0...3)
D4 SID lateral in cm (LSB)
D5 SID lateral in cm (MSB)
D6 Not used
D7 Not used
0x7F2
Message sent by board RSR008.
It contains the serial number over 8 bytes and is generated with control 7A3.
0x7F2 Input for RSR008 8
0x7F2
D0 ‘S’
D1 ‘/’
D2 ‘N’
D3 First digit of serial number
D4 Second digit of serial number

D5 Third digit of serial number
D6 Fourth digit of serial number
D7 Fifth digit of serial number
0x7F4
Message sent by board RSR008.
It contains the status of the front panel keypads relating to the table movements. This message
is transmitted at each second when any push button is pressed or at 80 ms when at least one
push button is pressed.
0x7F4 Outputs from RSR008 8
D0
b7 Not used
b6 Not used
b5 If 1: Right rotation
b4 If 1: Left rotation
b3 If 1: Upward
b2 If 1: Downward
b1 If 1: Right
b0 If 1: Left
0x7F4: Event
This message (disabled) is created as a result of an event only if transmission has been
enabled in configuration or temporarily by message 0x7A3 sub control.
Bytes:
0x7F4 dic=8
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 NOTES
Event Motor Par1 Par2 dato.HH dato.HL dato.LH dato.LL
Description of events
Event Code Motor Par1 Par2 Data

EV_POWER_ON 0x01 - *
EV_MOT_STARTED 0x02 1-n * Current position (SINT32)
EV_MOT_STOPPED 0x03 1-n * Current position (SINT32)
EV_DSC_STARTED 0x04 1-n * Current position (SINT32)
EV_DSC_STOPPED 0x05 1-n * Current position (SINT32)
EV_DONE 0x06 1-n * Current position (SINT32)
0x01: Temperature
EV_INFO 0x07 - * Current Temperature (SINT32)
returns in range
EV_INFO 0x07 - 0x02: LED board alarm *
Light Status:
EV_LIGHT 0x08 - * 0x00 = OFF

0x01 = ON
CAN Bus Status:
0,1
0x01 = BusOff
EV_CANBUS 0x09 CAN Bus
0x02 = BusOff recovery
CH
0x03 = Passive
EV_INIT_START 0x0A -
EV_MASTER_READY 0x0B - *
Key status
EV_KEY 0x0C - * 0 = automatic
1 = manual
EV_FILTER_READY 0x0D 1-n * Number of filter
Number of current steps when the
EV_STEPS_PHOTO 0x0E 1-n * photocell is cut
If 1: photocell is not cut
EV_POTENTIOMETER 0x0F 1-n * Analog value of potentiometer
Front pushbutton:
EV_PUSHBUTTON_FR 1=filter
0x010 * TURE= pressed
ONT 2=light
FALSE= released
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n 0x01: Format not possible * Incorrect position (SINT32)
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n 0x02: Filter * Number of potentiometer attempts
0x03: High Temperature
EV_ERROR 0x40 - * Current temperature (SINT32)
NTC
0x04: Low Temperature
EV_ERROR 0x40 - * Current temperature (SINT32)
NTC
0x05: Timout received by
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n motor on the external *
board
0x06: Format error from

EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n * Differences related to theoretical value
potentiometer feedback
0x07: HOME timeout
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n (generated motor *
number)
EV_ERROR 0x40 - 0x08: General Failure *
0x09: Wrong format from
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n feedback of potentiometer * Differences related to theoretical value
during the calibration.
Codes of LED board error:
0 = LAMP_ALARM_NONE
1 = LAMP_ALARM_OUT_ZERO
2 = LAMP_ALARM_LED_SCOLL
3 = LAMP_ALARM_KEY_PRESSED
4 = LAMP_ALARM_INT_TEMP
EV_ERROR 0x40 - 0x0A: LED board error
5 = LAMP_ALARM_EXT_TEMP
6 = LAMP_ALARM_SHUT_OFF_INT
7 = LAMP_ALARM_SHUT_OFF_EXT
10 = LAMP_ALARM_ERROR
100=LAMP_ALARM_ERROR_DIAG_0
101=LAMP_ALARM_ERROR_DIAG_1
Codes of memory error:
1 = MEM_ERR_CALIBR
EV_ERROR 0x40 - 0x0B: Memory data error
2 = MEM_ERR_SN
3 = MEM_ERR_CONFIG
Error Codes
0x0C: CAN FIFO 1 = FIFO Comandi
EV_ERROR 0x40 -
OverRun 2 = FIFO Configuration
3 = FIFO Remote
Error Codes:
0x0D: Connection error of
EV_ERROR 0x40 1-n 1 = “+” Cable disconnected
potentiometer (feedback)
2 = “-” Cable disconnected
0x7F5
This message may be transmitted by board RSR008 after having programmed transmission
time.
0x7F5 Output RSR008 8
D0
D0 MSB Cross Potentiometer Value
D1 LSB Cross Potentiometer Value
D2 MSB Long Potentiometer Value
D3 LSB Long Potentiometer Value
D4 Not used
D5 Not used
D6 Not used
D7 Not used
0x7F8
This message is transmitted by the RSR008 board, it contains the same data sent with the
message 0x7A3 in response to the same (see above).
0x7F8 Output 8
D0-D7 = the same data received with the message 0x7A3.

0x7F3, 0x7F4, 0x7F6, 0x7F7
Messages that are not used.
0x7F9
Message that may be transmitted by board RSR008 after having programmed transmission
time.
0x7F9
D0
b7 If 1: Indicates at least one shutter (Cross or Long) is completely closed
b6 Not used
b5 If 1: Indicates collimator is in the automatic or manual mode (red LED off)
b4 Not used
b3 Not used
b2 Not used
b1 Not used
b0 If 1: Light ON
D1
b7 Not used
b6 Not used
b5 Not used
b4 Not used
b3 If 1: Indicates Key in manual mode
b2 If 1: Indicates collimator in the automatic mode (green LED)
b1 If 1: Indicates collimator not operational (red LED)
b0 If 1: Indicates collimator manual operation (yellow LED)
D2
b7 If 1: Unit of measurement inches (0=centimetres)
b6 Not used
b5 If 1: Language - English (0=Italian)
b4 If 1: Fixed Vertical SID selection
b3 If 1: Filter present
b2 If 1: Iris present
b1 If 1: Long present
b0 If 1: Cross present
D3
b7 Not used
b6 Not used
b5 Not used
b4 Not used
b3 If 1: Lateral left Bucky
b2 If 1: Lateral right Bucky
b1 If 1: Vertical Bucky
b0 If 1: Differential vertical SID selection

D4
b7 Not used
b6 If 1: SID display enabled
b5 If 1: Right lateral CAN SID selection
b4 If 1: Left Lateral CAN SID selection
b3 If 1: CAN or ATS left lateral receptor
b2 If 1: CAN or ATS right lateral receptor
b1 If 1: Vertical CAN or ATS receptor
b0 If 1: Vertical filtering selection 2 mm (0=1 mm)
D5 MSB Iris aperture (in mm)
D6
b7 Not used
b6 Not used
b5 Not used
b4 Not used
b3 Not used
b2 If 1: Flash has been updated with a new configuration value
b1 If 1: Flash has been re-loaded with default values
b0 If 1: Error in data load from Flash
D7 LSB Iris aperture (in mm)
0x7FA, 0x7FB
These messages are not used
0x7FC
This message may be transmitted by board RSR008 after having programmed transmission
time.
0x7FC Output RSR008 8
D0
D0 MSB Cross present position indicated as the step number
D1 LSB Cross present position indicated as the step number
D2 MSB Long present position indicated as the step number
D3 LSB Long present position indicated as the step number

D4 MSB Filter present position indicated as the step number
D5 LSB Filter present position indicated as the step number
D6 Bit use according to the following meaning:

b0: If 1 opto-Switch of Cross closed is in the blackout mode, if 0 illuminated
b1: If 1 opto-Switch of Long closed is in the blackout mode, if 0 illuminated
b2: If 1 opto-Switch of Filter is in the blackout mode, if 0 illuminated
b3: If 1 opto-Switch of Cross open is in the blackout mode, if 0 illuminated
b4: If 1 opto-Switch of Long open is in the blackout mode, if 0 illuminated
b5, b6, b7: Not used
D7 Not used
0x7FD, 0x7FE, 0x7FF

These messages are not used
DISPLAY MESSAGES
0x7CO
This message allows to change the display during collimator operation: switching between
R225/ACS, R225/170/ACS and free display modes with a single control.
The control is not stored in the microprocessor Flash; on system power-up the collimator loads
the last value stored during configuration.
0x7CO INput for RSR008 8
DO New display type: 0x01 R225/ACS, 0x02 R225/170/ACS, 0x03 available
D1 - D7 Not used
0x7C1
The message is available in the "free” mode only. It allows to write data in a specific position
on the display.
Display is composed of two lines of 20 characters each.
Character position is identified singly as follows:
0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 0x0C 0x0D 0x0E 0x0F 0x10 0x11 0x12 0x13
0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2A 0x2B 0x2C 0x2D 0x2E 0x2F 0x30 0x31 0x32 0x33
Control 0x7C1 allows to write a string of 7 ASCII characters (max) starting from one of the
positions described above.
If the string exceeds the selected line, the invalid part is ignored.
The ASCII characters available in the display map have hexadecimal codes between 0x20 and
0x7F.
The following codes are also available:
0x01: Padlock closed
0x02: Padlock open
0x03: Mark °
Should the number of characters be fewer than 7, code 0 x 00 will be added at the end of the
string.
With this message it is possible to delete one or both lines.
Message structure:
.
0x7C1 Input RSR008 8
D0 Controls:
0x00...0x13: Writes from the mark specified in the first line
0x00...0x33: Writes from the mark specified in the second line
0xF1: Deletes the first line
0xF2: Deletes the second line
0xF3: Deletes both lines
D1 - D7 Characters to be entered (the value 0 indicates the string end)
Example:
H e l l o W o r l d !
W e l c o m e t o R a l c o !
The following sequence must be sent:
ID DLC D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Meaning
0x7C0 8 0x03 Switch the collimator in the mode: “Open display”
0x7C1 8 0xF3 Delete the display

0x7C1 8 0x03 0x48 0x65 0x6C 0x6C 0x6F 0x20 0x57 Writes “Hello W” starting from the position 03 hex
0x7C1 8 0x0A 0x6F 0x72 0x6C 0x64 0x21 0x00 0x00 Writes “orld” starting from the position 0A hex
0x7C1 8 0x21 0x57 0x65 0x6C 0x63 0x6F 0x6D 0x65 Writes “Welcome” starting from the position 21 hex
0x7C1 8 0x29 0x74 0x6F 0x20 0x52 0x61 0x6C 0x63 Writes “to Ralc” starting from the position 29 hex
0x7C1 8 0x30 0x6F 0x21 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 0x00 Writes “O!” starting from the position 30 hex
STATUS 0X100
This special message is sent by board RSR008 to any net node to transmit data related to
collimator operation.
.
0x100 Output RSR008 2/8
D0
b7 If 1: Collimator is in initial reset phase
b6 Used internally for relay switch lateral SID
b5 Used internally for relay switch lateral SID
b4 If 1: Indicates “x-ray” relay output to be activated
b3 If 1: Indicates “closed shutters” relay output to be activated
b2 If 1: Indicates “manual” relay output to be activated

b1 If 1: Indicates “hold” relay output to be activated
b0 If 1: Indicates “ready” relay output to be activated
D1
b7 Not used
b6 Not used
b5 Not used
b4 Not used
b3 Not used
b2 Not used
b1 Not used
b0 Not used
If 0x100 control has been set up to inform about possible alarms (dlc=8):
D2
b7 If 1: Filter alarm (position not correct)
b6 If 1: Cross alarm (position not correct)
b5 If 1: Long alarm (position not correct)
b4 If 1: Iris alarm (position not correct)
b3 If 1: Cross or Long reset alarm
b2 Not used
b1-b0 Number of successive trials of filter positioning (0-3)
D3 Total filter alarms from start-up
D4 Total Cross alarms from start-up
D5 Total Long alarms from start-up
D6 Total Iris alarms from start-up
D7 Not used
In the event of R225/006/ACS the control is sent to 0x7D0 address, in other cases to 0x100 address.
COMPLIANCE VERIFICATION
MINIMUM FILTRATION REQUIREMENT

To indicate compliance with 21 CFR, sub-chapter J, part 1020 of Performance Standard it is
necessary for the assembler to perform a series of tests.
Description of test methods are illustrated in this chapter but factors, such as experience,
availability of equipment and tolerance on compliance are referred directly to the Safety
Standards covering Electro-medical equipment.
WARNINGS
THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURES REQUIRE THAT X-RADIATION BE PRODUCED. TAKE

ADEQUATE PRECAUTIONS THAT NO PART OF HUMAN BEING IS EXPOSED TO
X-RADIATION, DIRECT OR INDIRECT.
The above HVL requirements can be met if it is demonstrated that the aluminium equivalent in
the primary beam is not less than that shown in the following table:
Minimum Filtration Requirement - Beam Quality (HVL)

X-Ray Tube Voltage Minimum HVL
(kilovolt peak) (mm of aluminum)
Designed Measured Specified Dental I-Other X-Ray II-Other X-Ray

Operating Range Operating Potential
(kVp) (kVp) System1 Systems2 Systems3
30 1.5 0.3 0.3

Below 51 40 1.5 0.4 0.4
50 1.5 0.5 0.5
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Compliance Verification
51 1.5 1.2 1.3

From 51 a70 60 1.5 1.3 1.5
70 1.5 1.5 1.8
71 2.1 2.1 2.5
80 2.3 2.3 2.9
90 2.5 2.5 3.2
100 2.7 2.7 3.6
Above 70 110 3.0 3.0 3.9
120 3.2 3.2 4.3
130 3.5 3.5 4.7
140 3.8 3.8 5.0
150 4.1 4.1 5.4
1
Dental X-ray Systems designed for use with intraoral image receptors and manufactured after
December 1, 1980.
2 Dental X-ray Systems designed for use with intraoral image receptors and manufactured
before or on December 1, 1980, and all other X-ray systems subjected to this section and
manufactured before June 10, 2006.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS COMPLIANCE VERIFICATION

3
All X-ray systems, except dental X-ray systems designed for use with intraoral image receptors
subjected to this section and manufactured on or after June 10, 2006.
The information contained in the above table was extracted from the Code of Federal
Regulations FDA 21 1020.30 (m).
Type 100 Aluminium Alloy (as given in “ALUMINUM STANDARDS AND DATA” verification of
compliance).
Visual Determination of Half-Value Layer (HVL)
The above HVL requirements can be met if it is demonstrated that the aluminium equivalent in
the primary beam is not less than that shown in the following Total Filtration table:
Total Filtration Of Primary Beam In Aluminium Equivalence
Total Filtration (mm Al

Operating Voltage (kVp)
Equivalent)
Below 50 0.5
From 51 to 70 1.5
Over 70 2.2
The Aluminium equivalence of each component in the primary beam (X-ray tube and housing,
beam limiting device and any additional filtration in the system) is specified on the component,
in the technical data attached to the component or can be measured. Determine the total
aluminium equivalence in the primary beam and make sure that it is equal or greater than those
specified in the above Table Total Filtration of Primary Beam in Aluminium Equivalence.
Quick-Check of Minimum Filtration Requirement at a Particular kVp
If the total inherent filtration cannot be seen, then the HVL must be obtained with the following
procedures:
The HVL in millimetres of aluminium in the system under test must be compared with those
specified in Table Minimum Filtration Requirement - Beam Quality (HVL) and must be
greater than or equal to the values shown in the table.
a) Direct the central X-ray beam perpendicular and in the center of a RAD-Check instrument.
Determine the exact distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to the window of the collimator
(273 mm - 10.75"). Place the input area of the RAD-CHECK at an equal distance from the
collimator window. Collimate the beam to an area slightly larger than the detector.
b) Make an exposure at a pre-selected technique factor of 90 kVp and appropriate mA and time
values with no added filtration in the beam; record the reading.
Using the type 1100 Aluminium Alloy, tape a total of 2.5 mm of Aluminium to the window of
the collimator. Make an exposure using the same technique factors; record the reading.
c) Verify that the radiation read with the 2.5 mm Al in the beam is greater or equal to 50% of
the radiation read with no filtration in the beam.
Standard Absorber Method
The HVL determination obtained from the following procedures are to be compared with those
illustrated in the Table - Minimum Filtration Requirement - Beam Quality (HVL). The HVL

in millimetres of aluminium obtained during the test must be greater or equal than the values
listed in the above mentioned table.
a) Direct the central X-ray beam perpendicular and in the center of a RAD-Check instrument.
Determine the exact distance from the X-ray tube focal spot to the window of the collimator
(273 mm - 10.75"). Place the input area of the RAD-CHECK at an equal distance from the
collimator window. Collimate the beam to an area slightly larger than the detector.
b) Select a tube potential of 100 kVp and appropriate mA and seconds, with no added filtration
in the beam make an exposure and record the reading. Using a set of several sheets of 1100
Aluminium Alloy, each having a thickness of 0.5 or 1.0 mm, tape the filtration to the window
of the collimator. Make an exposure for each increments of filtration and record the reading.
c) Plot the exposure readings (log scale) versus the total added filtration thickness on semi-log
paper; see the sample hereunder.
d) Verify that HLV values in the useful beam for the above specific tube potential is not less
than the values shown in Table - Minimum Filtration Requirement - Beam Quality (HVL).
VISUAL DEFINITION OF X-RAY VERSUS LIGHT FIELD

Chapter - COLLIMATOR CALIBRATION - paragraph - Light-Field to X-ray Field Alignment.
FIELD SIZE INDICATION

Chapter- ADJUSTMENTS, paragraph Field Size Indication.

CROSSHAIR ALIGNMENT
CHAPTER- ADJUSTMENTS, PARAGRAPH CROSSHAIR ALIGNMENT.
LIGHT FIELD ILLUMINATION INTENSITY

a) When a light field simulating the X-Ray field is used the illumination provided at 100 cm.
cannot be less than: 160 lux [(21 CFR 1020.31 (d) (2) (ii)].
b) Place the Focus of the X-Ray tube at 100 cm. from the table top were the light field as been
projected. Open the collimator's shutters to assure that each quadrant of the light field is
larger than the measuring area of the photometer.
c) Check that the voltage specified by the manufacturer is applied to the lamp, make certain
that all surfaces in the light beam are clean and unobstructed.
d) Place a photometer capable of reading up to 160 lux in the centre of each of the four
quadrants of the light field.
e) Turn on the light beam and read the light intensity, subtract to it the ambient lighting,
previously determined.
f) Verify that the average illumination is higher than 160 lux.
g) Verify that the contrast ratio is performed between two points:
• The first point at 3 mm outside the edge of the light field.
• The second point at 3 mm inside the edge of the light field.
These measurements are to be performed with the probe of the lux metre set at 1 mm
aperture.
h) Record the measured values including all data regarding the instrument and voltage
employed.
EMC COMPLIANCE
The ME Equipment is intended to be used in the PROFESSIONAL EM ENVIRONMENTS.
WARNING
TO ASSURE THAT ACCESSORIES, TRANSDUCERS AND CABLES THAT CAN

AFFECT THE EMISSIONS OR IMMUNITY OF THE ME EQUIPMENT, ACCESSORIES,
TRANSDUCERS AND CABLES ARE CHOSEN THAT WILL ALLOW THE ME EQUIPMENT
TO CONTINUE TO MEET THE EMISSIONS AND IMMUNITY REQUIREMENTS OF THIS
COLLATERAL STANDARD.

Electromagnetic Emissions
The R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS colimator is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The purchaser
or user of the R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described
below:
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment- Guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The Collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS needs special
CISPR 11 precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put into
service according to the EMC report.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect the
collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS.
RF emissions Class [A] This R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS is suitable for use in all
CISPR 11 establishments other than domestic and those directly connected
to the low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings
Harmonic emissions [Not applicable] used for domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2 The EMISSIONS characteristics of this equipment make it suit-
able for use in industrial areas and hospitals (CISPR 11 class A).
Voltage fluctuations/flicker [Not applicable] If it is used in a residential environment (for which CISPR 11 class
emissions B is normally required) this equipment might not offer adequate
IEC 61000-3-3 protection to radio-frequency communication services. The user
might need to take mitigation measures, such as relocating or re-
orienting the equipment

Electromagnetic Immunity for All Equipment and Systems

Collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS is intended for use in the electromagnetic environmenmt specified below. The
customer or the user should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity IEC 60601 Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment

Test Level Level
Electrostatic 8 kV contact EN 60601-1-2 Floors should be wood. concrete or ceramic tile. If floors
discharge (ESD) 2/4/8/15 kV air test level are covered with synthetic material. the relative humidity
IEC 61000-4-2 should be at least 30%.
Radiated 3 V/m IEC 60601-1-2 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment

electromagnetic 80 MHz to 2.7 GHz Test level should be used no closer to any part of the collimator R
field 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS. including cables. Mini-
IEC 61000-4-3 mum distance 30 cm
Electronical fast 2 kV for power EN 60601-1-2 Mains power quality should be that of a typical commer-
transient/burst supply lines test level cial or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-4 1 kV for input/output
lines >3m
Surge 0.5/1 kV differential EN 60601-1-2 Mains power quality should be that of a typical commer-
IEC 61000-4-5 mode test level cial or hospital environment.
0.5/1/2 kV common
mode
Conducted 3V IEC 60601-1-2 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment

disturbances 150 kHz to 80 MHz Test level should be used no closer to any part of the collimator R
induced by RF fields 6V 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS. including cables.
IEC 61000-4-6 ISM frequencies Minimum distance 30 cm
Voltage dips, short 10 ms – 0% a 0°, 45°, EN 60601-1-2 Mains power quality should be that of a typical commer-
interruptions and 90°, 135°, 180°. 225°, test level cial or hospital environment. If the user of the collimator
voltage variations 270°, 315° R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS requires continued op-
on power supply 20 ms – 0% a 0° eration during power mains interruptions. it is recom-
input lines 500 ms – 70% a 0° mended that the collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS
IEC 61000-4-11 5 s – 0% DHHS be powered from an uninterruptible power supply
or a battery.
Power frequency 30 A/m EN 60601-1-2 Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels
(50/60 Hz) test level characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial
magnetic field or hospital environment.
IEC 61000-4-8
Frequency Range and Level: RF wireless communication EQUIPMENT

Test Minimum IMMUNITY Level

Frequency Modulation IMMUNITY
(MHz) Level (V/m) Applied (V/M)
385 **Pulse Modulation: 18 Hz 27 27
450 *FM + 5 Hz deviation: 1 kHz sine 28 28
**Pulse Modulation: 18 Hz

Frequency Range and Level: RF wireless communication EQUIPMENT

745
780

870
930

1845
1970

5500
5785

COVER REMOVAL
(1).
REMOVE THE TWO KNOBS BY

UNSCREWING THE DOWEL.
(2).
REMOVE CAREFULLY THE

SNAP-ON FRONT PANEL.
(3).
DISCONNECT THE
CONNECTOR.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Cover Removal
(4).
REMOVE THE TAPE STOP BY

LIFTING IT OFF WITH A SCREW
DRIVER. GENTLY EASE THE
TAPE INTO ITS CONTAINER
WITHIN THE COLLIMATOR.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS COVER REMOVAL

(5).
TURN THE COLLIMATOR OVER

AND UNSCREW THE FOUR
SCREWS PLACED ON THE
RAILS.
(6).
REMOVE THE REAR COVER BY

UNSCREWING THE FOUR
SCREWS.
(7).
REMOVE THE LATERAL COVER

BY LIFTING IT OFF FROM THE
TWO SPACERS.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Cover Removal
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS COVER REMOVAL

ADJUSTMENTS
WARNINGS
THIS IS PROVIDED AS AN AID TO THE END USER. RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE ALTERING OF PRESET FACTORY
CONFIGURATIONS.
ADJUSTMENTS HAVE BEEN PRESET AT THE FACTORY PRIOR TO SHIPMENT OF
THE COLLIMATOR. SHOULD ANY PROBLEM ARISE REQUIRING THE NEED TO
RECALIBRATE, PLEASE CONTACT RALCO FOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PROCEEDING
WITH THE ADJUSTMENT.
EXTRA-FOCAL SHUTTERS
The instructions that follow are provided by way of information. The customer is advised to
contact Ralco prior to proceeding with the adjustment.
Close the Long and Cross shutters

completely either manually or via
electronic control.
Remove the covers, see Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Adjustments
Loosen the Long transmission fixing

screw.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS ADJUSTMENTS

Remove the shaft screw.
Keeping the Long shutters perfectly

closed, manually adjust the movement
transmission gear and position the
aperture of the long extra-focals to 8.0
mm +/- 0.5.
This value refers to the inside of the upper
shutters.
Position the shutters; remount the screw

on the transmission shaft.

Loosen the Cross transmission fixing

screw.
Remove the shaft screw.
Keeping the Cross shutters perfectly

closed, manually adjust the movement
transmission gear and position the
aperture of the Cross extra-focals to 3.0
mm +/- 0.5.
This value refers to the inside of the upper

shutters.

Position the shutters; remount the screw

on the transmission shaft.
Remount the collimator covers.
CROSSHAIR ADJUSTMENT
• Activate the light field.
• Adjust the light field to a narrow line for each pair of
shutters by turning the two knobs alternately.
• Check that the project cross line is exact halfway between
the edges of the shutters, see Fig. Cross Line.
• If adjustment is required, remove the cover from the sides
and bottom of the collimator, see Chapter - COVER
REMOVAL.
• Loosen the four screws securing the plastic panel and
adjust the cross lines to coincide with the light lines, see
Chapter - COVER REMOVAL. Fig. Cross Line
• Tighten the screws.

LASER LIGHT ADJUSTMENT Fig. Laser Line
The collimator laser is classified as Class 1

(1 m W - wavelength = 645 mm, +/- 10 nm);
used for collimator/image receptor center
alignment, see Fig. Laser Line.
WARNINGS
CAUTION: CLASS 1 LASER

SYSTEM DO NOT STARE
INTO THE BEAM.
Laser Adjustment
• Remove part of the cover to access the
point of adjustment, see Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
• The line is to fall on a perpendicular
cross-line on the plastic anti-dust panel
near the collimator controls, see Fig.
Laser Line.
• Adjust the position of the line by rotating
or moving the base of the laser system.
• To rotate the laser system, loosen
the Allen screw A, see Fig. Laser
Adjustment.
• Tighten the Allen screw when the
laser beam falls on or is parallel to
the bisector line drawn on the anti-
dust panel.
• Shift the laser system by loosening the
two B screws holding the laser system
base to the beam limiting device front
Fig. Laser Adjustment
plate.
• Move the base until the laser beam
falls over the perpendicular Fig. Laser Alignment

bisector line on the anti-dust panel,
see Fig. Laser Alignment.
• Tighten the two B screws.
WARNINGS
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE

FORCE TO THE SCREW. THE
LASER SHELL IS IN PLASTIC
AND EXCESSIVE PRESSURE
COULD CRACK THE PLASTIC
AND POSSIBLY SHORT-
CIRCUIT THE LASER.

Substitution
The Laser Substitution Kit is composed of the following components: the lase (A), the extension
cable (B) and the laser label (C) pictured below in Fig. Laser Substitution Kit. This Kit is
designed to substitute any laser Ralco provides.
Fig. Laser Substitution Kit
Prior to replacing the laser, confirm which version of laser is installed on your collimator which
will ensure the substitution is performed correctly.
• The previous laser version is connected to the board via 2 cables (red and white), see Fig.
Previous Laser Version below.
Fig. Previous Laser Version
• The new laser is connected to the board via the connector, see Fig. New Laser Version
below..
Fig. New Laser Version
Replacing the Previous Laser Version

To replace the previous version of laser, all components of the Laser Substitution Kit (A, B and
C) must be used.

To substitute the laser, proceed as follows:

1. Disconnect the collimator supply.
2. Remove the cover, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL in the Instruction Manual for your specific
model.
3. Prior to disconnecting the laser cables from the board, identify the cables and their position
on the terminal board, see Chapter INSTALLATION, paragraph Wiring Diagram in the
Instruction Manual for your specific model.
4. Carefully remove the laser, the extension cable and the label from their packaging.
5. Ensure the extension cable (B) is firmly connected to the laser (A), see Fig. Laser Substi-
tution Kit above.
6. Substitute the laser with the identical item using component (A) of the Laser Substitution
Kit, see Fig. Laser Substitution Kit above.
7. Adjust the length of the extension (B) cable by cutting the 2 cables (red/white).
8. Connect both cables to the board.
9. Apply the new laser label (C) to the collimator cover, see Chapter SPARE PARTS in the
Instruction Manual for your specific mode.
10.Verify the Laser alignment, see Chapter ADJUSTMENT or OPTIONAL ITEMS in the Instruction
Manual for your specific model.
Replacing the New Laser Version
To replace the new laser version, only part A and C of the Kit must be used.
• Disconnect the collimator supply.
• Remove the cover, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL in the Instruction Manual for your specific
model.
• Detach the connector of the faulty laser from the collimator wiring.
• Carefully remove the laser, the extension cable and the label from their packaging.
• Substitute the laser with the identical item using component (A) of the Laser Substitution
• Connect the new laser to the collimator wiring.
• Apply the new laser label (C) to the collimator cover, see Chapter SPARE PARTS in the
• Verify the Laser alignment, see Chapter ADJUSTMENT or OPTIONAL ITEM in the Instruction

Fig. Laser Control


TROUBLESHOOTING
A faulty Collimator must not be used until it is repaired and checked.
The use of a faulty collimator might impair the safety of the operator and patient.
Before returning the collimator to Ralco for repair, please make sure that the fault is not caused
by one of the problems listed below. If the indications provided fail to solve your fault, please
make sure that you obtain a Return number (RMA) from Ralco for the collimator, see
Chapter - GENERAL, paragraph Repairs.
GENERAL FAULT FINDING
Function Fault Description Fault finding and solutions
• Check if power supply is OK (see chapter SPECIFICATION)

Faulty light source • Check if LED power supply is + 3 V
• If still NOK, replace LED (see chapter SUBSTITUTIONS)
• Check if power supply is OK (see chapter SPECIFICATION)

• Check if timer board is supplied
• Check if fan operates when pressing the push button on the front panel
Faulty timer
• Check if green diode place on the timer is ON when pressing the push button
Light on the front panel.
• If NOK, replace the timer board (see chapter SUBSTITUTIONS)
Area defined by Light • Check if source flange distance is correct (see chapter INSTALLATION)
Field not (completely) on • Check if mirror or light source are positioned correctly (see chapter CALIBRA-
film TION)
• If still NOK, exchange the collimator.
Faulty ON/OFF push- • Check contact

button • If NOK, replace the front panel
Function Fault Description Fault finding and solutions
Shutters do not hold • Check if potentiometer are correctly calibrated (see chapter REPLACEMENTS)
position. • If still NOK, replace.
Shutters fail to move • Check motor cabling

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Troubleshooting
Shutters
• If still NOK, replace motor
Shutter close • Check motor cabling

• If still NOK, replace motor
INDICATORS GC-LED-4A
Number Color Description Fault finding and solutions
LED1 Green +12 V DC or +24 V DC In case LED1 is OFF:

• check if +12/+24 V is present; LED1 should be ON
• if still NOK, check if system cables are connected correctly to
GC-LED-4A
• if still NOK, replace GC-LED-4A (see chapter SUBSTITUTIONS)
• if still NOK, replace collimator.
LED2 Yellow Software version • check if LED2 blinks 4 times

• if NOT, wrong software version, replace collimator (see chap-
ter SUBSTITUTIONS)
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS TROUBLESHOOTING

LED3 Red Alarms 1 blink: Disconnected LED or Driver failure

• check if LED is connected correctly
• if still NOK, replace LED
2 blinks: LED short circuit
• remove the short circuit
• if still NOK, replace LED
3 blinks: Fan failure or disconnected
• check if fan is connected correctly
• if still NOK, replace fan (see chapter SUBSTITUTIONS)
4 blinks: Laser failure or disconnected
• check if laser is connected correctly
• if still NOK, replace laser (see chapter SUBSTITUTIONS)
5 blinks: push button pressed longer than 5 seconds or short-
circuited
• check if push button works properly
• remove short circuit if present
6 blinks: PCB temperature > 105°
• switch OFF the collimator for 10 minutes
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Troubleshooting
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS TROUBLESHOOTING

SUBSTITUTIONS
LED SUBSTITUTION
WARNING
NOT IMMEDIATELY TOUCH THE DISSIPATER WITH YOUR FINGERS IT COULD BE HOT
AND CAUSE SEVERE BURNS.
DO NOT TOUCH THE LIGHT SOURCE, THE SOCKET, OR THE LIGHT BRACKET WITH
YOUR FINGER. THEY CAN BE VERY HOT AND CAUSE SEVERE BURNS.
DO NOT TOUCH THE LED LENS WITH YOUR FINGERS DIRECTLY, EVEN WHEN
IT IS COLD. OIL FROM YOUR SKIN WILL LOWER THE LED PERFORMANCE.
IF YOU HAVE TOUCHED THE LED, WIPE THE LED SURFACE WITH A SOFT
CLOTH IN CASE OF CONTACT.
The LED Substitution Kit is composed of the following components: the LED (A), and an
extension cable (B), pictured in Fig. LED Substitution Kit. This Kit is designed to substitute
any LED Ralco provides.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Substitutions
Fig. LED kit
Prior to replacing the LED, confirm which version of LED is installed on your collimator which
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS SUBSTITUTIONS

• The previous version LED is connected to the board via 2 cables (red and black), see Fig.
Previous Version LED below.
Fig. Previous Version LED
• The new LED is connected to the board via the connector, see Fig. New Version LED
below.
Fig. New Version LED
Replacing the Previous Version LED

To replace the previous version of LED, both components of the LED Substitution Kit (A and
B) must be used.
To substitute the LED, proceed as follows:
• Remove the cover, see Chapter - COVER REMOVAL in the Instruction Manual for your spe-
cific model.
• Remove the LED heat sink protection by unscrewing the 2 screws C, see Fig. LED Substi-
tution below.
• Prior to disconnecting the LED cables from the board, identify the cables and their position
• Carefully remove the LED and the extension cable from their packaging.
• Make sure that the extension cable (B) is firmly connected to the LED (A), see Fig. LED
kit.
• Adjust the length of the extension (B) cable by cutting the 2 cables (red/black).
• Connect both cables to the board.
• Remount the heat sink protection by tightening the two fixing screws (C), see Fig. LED
Substitution below.
• Remount the covers in reverse order, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL.
• Verify the Light Field/X-Ray field correspondence, see Chapter CALIBRATION.

Replacing the New Version LED

To replace the new version LED, only part A of the Kit must be used.
To substitute the LED, proceed as follows:
• Disconnect supply.
• Remove the cover, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL.
• Remove the LED heat sink protection by unscrewing the 2 screws C, see Fig. LED Substi-
tution below.
• Detach the connector of the faulty LED from the collimator wiring.
• Substitute the LED with an identical item by using the part A of the LED Substitution Kit.
• Remount the heat sink protection by tightening the 2 fixing screws C, see Fig. LED Substi-
tution below.
• Remount the covers in reverse order, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL.
• Verify the Light Field/X-Ray field correspondence, see Chapter CALIBRATION.
Fig. LED Substitution
SUBSTITUTION OF THE ELECTRONIC BOARD RSR008

• Remove the cover to access the component, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL.
• Identify the cables and their position on the board, see Chapter INSTALLATION.
• Disconnect the cables from the electronic board RSR008.
• Remove the RSR008 boards by unscrewing the fixing screws.

• Substitute the board and remount in reversed order; pay particular attention to the connec-
tion of the cables.
• Power up the collimator and make sure that the collimator operates correctly.

SUBSTITUTION OF THE ELECTRONIC BOARD FOR LED

The PCB Substitution Kit is composed of the following
components: the board (A), an extension cable (B)*
and 8 jumpers (C), pictured in opposite Fig. PCB
Substitution Kit. This Kit is designed to substitute the
previous version of the timer board for LED.
(B)* - The extension cable is added only if the
collimator model is equipped with the additional
filtration and with the indicator diode place on the
front panel. In other cases, is useless and it will
not be added to the PCB Substitution Kit.
To substitute the timer board, proceed as follows:
1. Disconnect the collimator supply.
2. Remove the cover, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL
in the Instruction Manual for your specific model.
3. Prior to disconnecting the cables from the board,
identify the cables and their position on the termi-
Fig. PCB Substitution Kit
nal board, see Chapter INSTALLATION, paragraph
Wiring Diagram in the Instruction Manual for your
specific model
4. Carefully remove the timer board, the extension
cable and the
jumpers from their packaging.
The next 3 steps are applicable only to the collimator
equipped with the additional filtration and the indicator
diode placed on the front panel.
• Insert the extension cable (B) in the J4
connector, placed on the new timer board,
see Fig. Extension Cable.
• Detach the connector from the faulty timer
board, see Fig. Connector Removal below.
• Connect the unplugged connector to the
extension cable (B), see Fig. Extension

Cable Connection below. Fig. Extension Cable
5. Remove the 2 screws holding the timer board.
6. Install the new timer board by proceeding in a reverse order; pay particular attention to the
connection of the cables on the 2 or 8-way electric terminal.
7. Correctly set up the board by using the 8 jumpers (C) according to the Wiring Diagram. See
Chapter INSTALLATION, paragraph Wiring Diagram and GC-LED-4A in the Instruction Man-
ual for your specific model for further information.
8. Remount the covers in reverse order, see Chapter COVER REMOVAL.
9. Verify the Light Field/X-Ray field correspondence, see Chapter CALIBRATION.

Fig. Connector Removal Fig. Extension Cable Connection
SUBSTITUTION OF SQUARE FIELD MOTORS

• Remove the cover, see Chapter - COVER REMOVAL.
• Disconnect the motor connector.
• Unscrew the motor support screws A, see Fig. 1
and/or Fig. 3.
• Unscrew the Allen screws B, see Fig. 2.
• Substitute the support with an identical part.
• Remount the support with a new motor.
• Reconnect the connector.
• Mount the front panel.
Fig. 1
Fig. 2 Fig. 3

WARNING
PLASTIC GEARS ARE NOT ALWAYS UNIFORM. POSSIBLE DEFORMATION COULD HARDEN
OR BLOCK MOVEMENTS.
CHECK THAT MOVEMENTS ARE FREE FROM OBSTRUCTIONS ALLOWING THE LEAST
PLAY POSSIBLE BETWEEN GEARS.
SUBSTITUTION OF THE MIRROR Fig. 1 Substitution of the Mirror
• Remove the collimator cover, see Chapter -

COVER REMOVAL.
• Remove the four screws on the upper left
partition, see Fig.1.
• Lift off the upper part of the right-hand parti-
tion, see Fig. 2.
• Substitute the mirror and remount in
reversed order, see Figure 3.
Fig. 2Substitution of the Mirror Fig. 3 Substitution of the Mirror


SPARE PARTS
NOTE
WHEN ORDERING SPARE PARTS, THE CUSTOMER IS REQUESTED TO SPECIFY

THE COLLIMATOR MODEL AND SERIAL NUMBER.
THE SPARE PARTS LISTED BELOW REFER TO THE STANDARD MODEL ONLY.
PLEASE CONSULT YOUR PERSONALIZATION PAGE TO VERIFY WHICH SPARE PARTS

MAKE UP YOUR CUSTOMIZED MODEL
Labels
LABEL 1A LABEL 1B LABEL 2
LABEL 1C
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Spare Parts
LABEL 3A LABEL 3B LABEL 4
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS SPARE PARTS

LABEL 5 LABEL 6 LABEL 7
Fig. Standard Labels - LED and Laser ( Red Laser Line). Fig. DHHS Labels - LED and Laser ( Red Laser Line).
Fig. Standard Laser Label (Red Laser Line) Fig. DHHS Laser Label (Red Laser Line)

Fig. Standard Laser Labels (2 Red Laser Lines)

- Optional Item RO 242/2 Fig. DHHS Laser Labels (2 Red Laser Lines)
- Optional Item RO 242/2
Fig. Standard Labels - LED and Laser (2 Red Laser Fig. DHHS Labels - LED and Laser (2 Red Laser Lines,
Lines, Optional Item RO 242/2) Optional Item RO 242/2)

R225 ACS - R225 ACS DHHS STANDARD
PN DESCRIPTION
RS 754 Right accessory guide
RS 755 Left accessory guide
RS 781 Switch
RS 1004 Upper cover, up to SN 716
RS 1010 Antidust panel
RS 1011 Retractable tape measure
RS 1012 Mounting flange
RS 1013 Mirror
RS 1106 Fan
RS 1120 Knob
RS 1124 Front panel, up to SN 716
RS 1125 Lower cover, up to SN 716
RS 1126 Left lateral cover, up to SN 716
RS 1127 Rear cover, up to SN 716
RS 1129 Right lateral cover, up to SN 716
RS 1162 RSR008 board
RS 1166 Screw, TC M3x20mm
RS 1261 Upper cover, from SN 717
RS 1262 Lower cover, from SN 717
RS 1263 Rear cover, from SN 717
RS 1264 Front cover, from SN 717
RS 1277 Right accessory guide spacer
RS 1278 Left accessory guide spacer
RS 1365 Right lateral cover, from SN 717
RS 1366 Left lateral cover, from SN 717
RS 2464 Lateral access panel
RS 2539 LED board
RS 2589 Laser
RS 2749 LED
RS 2809 Right lateral cover

PARTS BREAKDOWN

OPTIONAL ITEMS
This collimator may have the following optional items; a detailed description is provided in this
chapter.
RO 002 Iron Mounting Flange Spacer
This accessory is used for the mounting

flange; 1.5 mm thickness.
RO 063 Final Quality Test Report Documentation

This test provides higher control to check 100% of the production lot to verify product quality
from beginning to end of the production cycle.
Final tests include:
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Optional Items
• Light field illumination intensity (if applicable),

• Light field to X-ray field alignment (if applicable),
• X-ray leakage test,
• Edge contrast (if applicable),
• Operation and electronic check up.
RO 074 External housing and guide rails in customized color
The customer can specify a collimator cover color. Ralco’s standard color is RAL9003.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS OPTIONAL ITEMS

RO 082 Glass Mirror
Glass mirror, 0.8 mm thickness, inherent filtration 1 mm Al equivalent. With this mirror, the
collimator equivalent filtration value of 2 mm Al is reduced to 1 mm Al.
RO 096 Wiring Customization
Customized electrical wiring. If ordered please refer to the PERSONALIZATIONS, annex

included with this Instruction Manual, Chapter – Installation, paragraph Wiring Diagram.
RO 107 Knob Color Customization
The customer can specify the required knob color.
RO 111 Front panel customization
The customer can customize the front panel adding, for example, the Company Logo and/
or the Company colors.
RO 203 Self-centering top-cover bracket for Siemens X-Ray tube
This bracket is designed for Siemens X-Ray tube only (flange provided by Siemens only).

NOTE
RALCO RECOMMENDS FOLLOWING THE BELOW PROCEDURE, DURING THE INSTALLATION OF THE COLLI-
MATOR EQUIPPED WITH THE SIEMENS TOP COVER TO THE X-RAY TUBE. THE CORRECTLY PERFORMED
PROCEDURE ALLOWS THE COLLIMATOR TO ROTATE FREELY.
PROCEDURE:
1. REMOVE THE COLLIMATOR FROM ITS PACKAGING AND PLACE IT ON A FLAT SURFACE,
2. UNSCREW ALL 3 FIXING SCREWS OF THE COLLIMATOR, SEE FIG. 1,
3. INSTALL THE COLLIMATOR ONTO THE FLANGE PREVIOUSLY MOUNTED TO
THE X-RAY TUBE.
4. TIGHTEN ALL 3 SCREWS COMPLETELY, SO THAT THE TABS WILL TOUCH
THE FLANGE SLIGHTLY,
5. ONCE THE SCREWS ARE COMPLETELY TIGHTENED LOOSEN ONE BY ONE ABOUT
1/2 TURN (180°) TO ALLOW THE COLLIMATOR TO ROTATE FREELY. SEE FIG. 2.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2
RO 210 Aluminium Acessory Guides

Aluminium accessory guides in RAL 9003 used to input filters or ionization chamber.
RO 240 Focal-spot to skin spacer

This accessory ensures a minimum safety
distance (309.5 mm) between the X-ray focus
and the patient.
THIS ACCESSORY DEALS WITH PREVENTING

THE USE OF INAPPROPRIATE SMALL FOCUS/
SKIN DISTANCES IN ORDER THAT THE DOSE
EQUIVALENT TO THE PATIENT BE KEPT AS
LOW AS REASONABLY POSSIBLE.
1 - Countersunk Screws, 2 - Focus-Skin Distance Spacers,

3 - Collimator Cover.

RO 242/1 Single Laser Line to align collimator and detector center: Class 2
The collimator laser is classified as Class 2 (1 Fig. Laser Line

m W - wavelength = 645 mm +/- 10 nm); used
for collimator/image receptor center
alignment, see Fig. Laser Line.

SYSTEM DO NOT STARE INTO THE
BEAM.
Laser Adjustment
• Remove part of the cover to access the
point of adjustment, see Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
• The line is to fall on a perpendicular cross-
line on the plastic anti-dust panel near the
collimator controls, see Fig. Laser Line.
• Adjust the position of the line by rotating or
moving the base of the laser system.
• To rotate the laser system, loosen
the Allen screw A, see Fig. Laser
Adjustment.
• Tighten the Allen screw when the
laser beam falls on or is parallel to
the bisector line drawn on the anti-
dust panel.
• To tilt the laser system, loosen the 2
screws C placed on the laser support
and shift it upwards or downwards.
See Fig. Laser Adjustment.
• Once the position of the laser line
has been adjusted, tighten the 2

screws C.
• Shift the laser system by loosening the two Fig. Laser Adjustment
B screws holding the laser system base to
the beam limiting device front plate.
• Move the base until the laser beam
falls over the perpendicular bisector
line on the anti-dust panel, see Fig.
Laser Alignment.
Fig. Laser Alignment

• Tighten the two B screws.
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE

FORCE TO THE SCREW. THE
LASER SHELL IS IN PLASTIC AND
EXCESSIVE PRESSURE COULD
CRACK THE PLASTIC AND POSSI-
BLY SHORT-CIRCUIT THE LASER.
Classification EN 60825-1 par. 1 -5: Class 2 laser product => Red laser line.
RO 242/2 Two lasers (one mounted externally) forming a crosshair to center the patient
to the collimator: Class 2
Second laser which serves to center
the patient using the cross projection.
The collimator lasers are classified as
Class 2 (1 m W - wavelength = 645
mm, +/- 10 nm) and are used for
collimator/image receptor center
alignment.
WARNING

SYSTEM DO NOT STARE INTO
THE BEAM

CALIBRATION CONTROL
• Draw a cross (two lines at 90°) on a sheet of paper and
use this as reference.
• Switch the light ON and set the sheet of paper at 1 m from
the focus.
• Make sure the cross on the paper coincides exactly with
the two lines silk-screened on the plastic window. Collimator
• Examine the laser projections on the paper: the laser is crosshair
correctly calibrated when the projections coincide with the projection
lines drawn on the paper, otherwise an adjustment will be
necessary.
ADJUSTMENT Laser line
projection
Horizontal
• Disconnect power supply.
• Remove the laser cover located on the rail by unscrewing Fig. Laser projections
the two screws A, see Fig. Horizontal Laser.
• To correct horizontal misalignment, loosen the screws B,
see Fig. Horizontal Laser and move the laser support until the projected laser line
coincides with the cross on the sheet of paper. Tighten screws B.
Vertical
• Disconnect power supply.
• Remove the knobs and front panel, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL.
• To correct vertical misalignment, loosen the Allen screw A, see Fig. Vertical Laser on the
laser support; rotate the laser and align the laser line over the cross on the sheet of paper.
Tighten B screw s.
WARNING
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE FORCE TO THE SCREW. THE LASER

SHELL IS IN PLASTIC AND EXCESSIVE PRESSURE COULD CRACK THE
PLASTIC AND POSSIBLY SHORT-CIRCUIT THE LASER.
SUBSTITUTION
Horizontal
• Remove the laser cover located on the rail by unscrewing the two screws A, see Fig.
Horizontal Laser.
• Disconnect the timer cables from the terminal board - white 0 V, red 5 V.
• Remove the laser and substitute with an identical item.
• Tighten the screws.
• Check the laser alignment, see paragraph ADJUSTMENT.
• Remount the laser cover.
Vertical
• Remove the knobs and front panel, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL.
• Loosen the Allen screw A, see Fig. Vertical Laser on the laser support.
• Disconnect the timer cables from the terminal board - white 0 V, red 5 V.
• Remove the laser and substitute with an identical item.

• Tighten the Allen screw.

• Check the laser alignment, see paragraph ADJUSTMENT.
• Remount the laser cover.
Fig. Horizontal Laser Fig. Vertical Laser
RO 278 Fixed Near Focal Shutters
Upper cover with extra-focal shutters to

allow the use of the collimator with
rotating anode X-ray tubes; brass extra-
focal.

RO 305 Additional Variable Filtration - Automatic Selection
Fig. 1
Additional variable filtration may be added to the
minimum collimator filtration in the form of an
aluminium disk, 1 mm thickness, with automatic
control via the electronic PCB.
The disk features a hole allowing the passage of
X-rays and includes three filters with the following
filtration values:
• 0: no filtration
• 0,1 mm Cu + 1 mm Al. (Al eq. 3.5 mm)
• 0,2 mm Cu + 1 mm Al (Al eq. 6.0 mm)
• 1 mm Al + 1 mm Al support (Al eq. 2.0 mm).
Fig. 2
Adjustments
PHOTOCELL ADJUSTMENT
• Remove the front panel - See Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
• Disconnect the connector from the RSR008
PCB.
• Unscrew the 4 screws “D” holding the RSR008
PCB on the front plate, see fig. 1
• Unscrew the 2 screws “C” holding the filter sys-
tem on the front plate, see fig. 2
• Remove the support together with the filter from
the collimator.
• Adjust the photocell by using the 2 screws “B”
located on the support, see fig. 3
• When adjusted is terminated, tighten the “B” screws, see fig. 3
• Remount the support and the front plate.
Substitutions Fig. 3
SUBSTITUTION OF THE FILTER MOTOR

• Remove the front panel.
• Remove the cover - See Chapter - COVER
REMOVAL.
• Disconnect motor connector J8 on board RSR008.
• Unscrew the 2 screws “A” from the front wall, see
fig. 4
• Substitute with an idential item.
• Remount the support with the new motor.
• Connect the connector removed previously.
• Remount the cover and front panel.

SUBSTITUTION OF FILTER MOVEMENT PHOTOCELL Fig. 4

• Remove the front panel.
• Remove the cover- See Chapter - COVER REMOVAL.
• Disconnect the four photocell cables on terminal J2
on the board RSR008.
• Unscrew the 2 screws “B” from the front wall, see
fig. 3
• Substitute with an identical item.
• Remount the support with the photocell.
• Connect the four photocell cables on terminal J2.
• Remount the cover and front panel.
RO 305/1 Additional Variable Filtration

Additional variable filtration may be added to the
minimum collimator filtration in the form of an aluminium
disk, 1 mm thickness, with automatic control via the
electronic PCB.
The disk features a hole allowing the passage of
X-rays and includes three filters with the following
filtration values:
• 0: no filtration.
• 0,1 mm Cu (Al eq. 2.5 mm)
• 0,2 mm Cu (Al eq. 5.0 mm)
• 0,3 mm Cu (Al eq. 7.5 mm)
Fig. RO 305/1
To adjust and/or to change the filter see RO 305
Additional Variable Filtration description in this
Chapter.
RO 308 External Board ASR003

ASR003 Board
Characteristics
• Analogical/ Digital interface.
• Vertical SID interface with potentiometers for table and stand, Potter Bucky, (vertical, right,
left) inputs.
• Interface for 5 fixed lateral distances.
• Interface for general controls; e.g., open/close for shutters, tomography.
• CanBus interface.
Description
• Board ASR003 is an extension of the radiological system, providing an interface for the col-
limator to other system devices with analogical signals.
• It operates via CAN BUS with a Ralco proprietary protocol.
• The user end features 32 digital inputs, 8 analogue inputs and 10 relay outputs.
• Digital inputs are optoisolated to allow connection to devices that supply output control volt-
ages (typical range 12-32 V DC).

• Supply: 24 V AC 50/60 Hz 3.5 A.

• Fuse: n.a. (not supplied by Ralco).
Digital and Analogue Inputs
Digital Input
Since the input signal sometimes comes from a voltage-free contact, the board features a
number of pins to which an external supply may be connected. As an alternative, these pins
may be connect to a voltage incoming from board ASR003 itself by simply connecting pin M79
to pin M80 and, pin M81 to pin M82.
The available voltage is not taken upstream of the voltage regulator but downstream of the fuse
and rectifier bridge.
The type of software applied determines the function of each input.
.
Analogue Input
In this case the input range will be reduced with respect to the digitalization capacity of the
microprocessor digital/analogue convertor. However, the board will have better protection
against wrong Potentiometer connections.
The analogue inputs are designed primarily for connection to 1 Kohm potentiometers.
Additional safeguards have been added because the user could supply an analogue signal
directly without using potentiometers.
The main purpose of these inputs is to furnish the collimator with the cassette size data and
information related to focus-film/focus-floor distances (depending on the configuration).
In general, non linearity introduced by the safeguards is contained. However, should a greater
degree of precision be required (such as in the case of focus-film/focus-floor signals) we
suggest that a voltage between 0 and 6 V DC be supplied so as to make the most of the
convertor range.
Higher voltages up to 12 V, which could be caused by incorrect connections, will not damage
the input.
The 10 output relays each have an NO/NC contact and may consequently be adapted to a
number of different configurations. Their use depends on the software applied.

This board also supplies the go-ahead to program some of the system parameters.
Mechanical Installation of the
External Interface Unit
The external box is to be
installed in such a way as to
ensure connection of all the
electric devices present in the
radiological system.
We suggest that the box be
installed at a safe distance from
electromagnetic sources such
as high voltage transformers.
Use the holes on the sides of the
box to perform the installation.
Should it be necessary to install
the board within a rack of the
general system, remove the electronic board from the box prior to proceeding with the
installation of the box itself.
Make sure that each portion of the rack that is to accommodate the box is adequately earthed.
External Unit Labels
Electrical Connection
NOTE
POWER MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A SAFETY TRANSFORMER COMPLIANT WITH CURRENT

NORMS AND PROTECTED BY AN FUSE 4 A.
• Connect the collimator using the connection cable. The cable end with the AMP 201298-1
connector is to be inserted into the connector at the back of the collimator.

• The other end of the cable, with the DB9 connector and 3 wires, must be connected to the
CanBus interface and power supply, see Fig. 1.
• Consult the electric drawing to perform a correct connection of inputs.
Fig. 1
WARNINGS
COLLIMATOR SUPPLY IS NOT PROTECTED BY A FUSE. PRIOR TO CONNECTING THE

COLLIMATOR, CHECK THAT SUPPLY IS PROTECTED BY AN EXTERNAL FUSE 4A, NOT
SUPPLIED BY RALCO, SEE CHAPTER- SPECIFICATIONS.
SUPPLY CABLES (24 V AC 50/60 HZ 3.5 A) USED FOR COLLIMATOR CONNECTION

MUST BE SUITABLE FOR THE PURPOSE AND COLLIMATOR CURRENT
ABSORPTION.(MIN. SECTION 1.5 MM2).
THE SYSTEM REQUIRES SCREENED CABLES WITH THE ADDITION OF FERRITE CORES
(NOT SUPPLIED) TO AVOID ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE WITH THE SERVER ELEC-
TRONICS.
CABLES FROM THE SYSTEM TO THE EXTERNAL BOARD MUST BE SCREENED.
THE FERRITE CORES ARE TO BE MOUNTED ON THE CABLES INSIDE THE BOX AS
SHOWN IN THE DRAWING BELOW. FERRITE CORES ARE USED TO ATTENUATE
INDUCTION AND IRRADIATION OF ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE.
WE SUGGEST A 279 FERRITE, ATTENUATION RANGE 100 MHZ TO 200 MHZ, SUITED
TO YOUR CABLES; IE: MSFC-10 FERRITE BY RICHCO.

NOTE
THE WIRING DIAGRAM INCLUDED IN THIS DOCUMENT REFERS TO THE STANDARD

PRODUCT. IT IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CUSTOMER WHO HAS REQUESTED
AN ELECTRIC CUSTOMIZATION, TO ENSURE THAT AN ELECTRIC DIAGRAM RELATING
TO THE CUSTOMIZATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED WITH THE DOCUMENTATION.
THE DEVICE IS PROJECTED TO OPERATE WITH A PERMANENT POWER SUPPLY

PRESENT SO THE PROCEDURE OF SWITCHING OFF THE COLLIMATOR IS NOT FORESEEN.
NO RISK OR DEVICE DAMAGE WILL OCCUR IF THE MACHINE IS ACCIDENTLY SWITCHED
OFF.
WARNING
THE DEVICE MUST BE EXCLUSIVELY CONNECTED TO POWER NETWORK, WITH

EARTH PROTECTION, IN ORDER TO AVOID A RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK.
SUPPLY AND SIGNALS TO THE COLLIMATOR MUST BE TO 2007/47/CE STANDARDS.

DEVICES THAT SUPPLY THE COLLIMATOR MUST THEREFORE FEATURE DOUBLE
OR REINFORCED INSULATION AS PROVIDED BY THE GENERAL STANDARD ON ELEC-
TROMEDICAL EQUIPMENT CEI62-5 +A2 (EN 60601-1).
THE DEVICE IS ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE, CONSEQUENTLY ALL THE RELATING
SAFETY STANDARDS MUST BE COMPLIED WITH.
COLLIMATOR MUST BE SUPPLIED AS SPECIFIED, SEE CHAPTER SPECIFICATIONS.

THE SUPPLY MUST COME FROM A SEPARATE SOURCE FROM THE POWER NETWORK
THROUGH DOUBLE INSULATION OR REINFORCED INSULATION AND WITH LIMITED
CURRENT. TRANSFORMER CHARACTERISTICS MUST CONFORM TO THE REQUIREMENTS
OF STANDARD IEC 60601-1.
CABLES AND TERMINALS USED FOR THE INTERNAL CONNECTION OF THE COLLIMATOR
MUST BE SUITABLE FOR OPERATION AT TEMPERATURES OF 80°C AND COLLIMATOR
CURRENT ABSORPTION.
TO ENSURE THE SAFE USE OF THE COLLIMATOR, IT IS MANDATORY TO SECURELY

AND FIRMLY INSERT THE POWER SUPPLY/DATA CABLE BETWEEN THE COLLIMATOR
AND RADIOLOGICAL SYSTEM. IT IS ALSO MANDATORY THAT THE POWER SUPPLY/
DATA CABLE IS CORRECTLY SECURED TO THE STRAIN RELIEF. IF THE STRAIN
RELIEF IS MISSING IT IS MANDATORY ONE BE CORRECTLY AND SECURELY INSTALLED.
RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN THE EVENT OF MISSING OR INCORRECT
CABLE INSTALLATION.
Connection of System to ASR003 Board

All the system devices listed in the following tables (variable SID table, variable SID stand,

fixed lateral SID, vertical Bucky, lateral Bucky, etc.) are to be connected to the connectors of
the external board. Correct operation of the system is guaranteed if the return signals
from the Bucky (if mounted) and SID Potentiometers are clean and devoid of electrical
disturbances. Use tri-polar screened cables with the addition of ferrite cores near the
connections to the PC board (external unit).
The SID variation control signal must be analogue DC, 5 V DC max.
WARNINGS
TAKE CARE THAT ELECTRICAL RESIDUES HOWEVER SMALL (BITS OF COPPER LEADS
FROM WIRES, ETC.) ARE NOT LEFT TO CLUTTER THE CIRCUIT - THESE COULD
CAUSE BOARD MALFUNCTION OR ANOMALIES.
Earthing of the collimator circuit is used to disperse noise or extra voltage coming from the
collimator supply system.
The device that disperses noise is reversible, consequently noise instead of being eliminated
is fed into the system power supply circuit. Therefore, it is essential that the earth outlet to
which the system is connect be effectively the unipotential protection point of the system or
the room.
POWER SUPPLY
IN-AN Supply 24 V AC 50/60 Hz 3.5 A M83
IN-AN Supply 24 V AC 50/60 Hz 3.5 A M84
IN/OUT Mains Ground Contact M85
IN = Digital Input Signal
IN-AN = Analogical Input Signal

OUT= Output Signal

Fig. ASR003 Board


MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Optional Items Model R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS

OUTPUTS
All outputs are simple relay contacts (1 A 24 V DC) configured as normally
open.Output relays can switch 1 A to 110 V AC or 30 V DC; do not exceed
these values and provide fuses on load supply circuits.
If relays are used to switch inductive loads (coils of other relays), provide
these loads with appropriate snubber R-C circuits.
Should an electric signal be produced by a multi-contact relay, ground the
contacts surrounding the signal or set them at minimum potential (max. 24
V) by using a snubber circuit for the relating load.
Signal Description Contacts
OUT1 With closed contact the system is in "Ready " mode COM M1
N.C. M2
N.O. M3
OUT2 With closed contact the system is in “Exp.Hold” mode COM M4
N.C. M5
N.O. M6
OUT3 With closed contact system is in “Manual” COM M7
N.C. M8
N.O. M9
OUT4 Closed contact: “Closed Shutters” COM M10
N.C. M11
N.O. M12
OUT5 With closed contact the system allows the X-ray “Exposure” COM M13
N.C. M14
N.O. M15
Signal Contact Description

IN M31 Common +V DC
IN M32 Long shutters open
IN M33 Long shutters closed
IN M34 Common +V DC
IN M35 Cross shutters open
IN M36 Cross shutters closed
IN M37 Common +V DC
IN M38 Iris shutters open
IN M39 Iris shutters closed
IN M40 Common +V DC
IN M41 Filter selection 1

IN M43 Common +V DC

IN M46 Common +V DC
IN M47 Collimator Light ON
IN M48 Exclusion of collimator tilt device
IN M49 Common +V DC
IN M50 Manual Mode selection
IN M51 Tomography Mode selection

IN M52 Common contacts selection (+V DC)
IN M53 Contact for the fixed lateral full size SID - 1
IN M54 Contact for the fixed lateral full size SID - 2

IN M55 Common contacts selection (+V DC)
IN M56 Cassette IN contact, table Bucky
IN M57 Fluoro 1
IN M58 Common contact table Bucky (+V DC)
IN M59 Cassette IN contact, left lateral Bucky
IN M60 Cassette IN contact, full size left lateral
IN M61 Common contact and full size left lateral (24 V DC)
IN M62 Cassette IN contact, right lateral Bucky
IN M63 Cassette IN contact, full size right lateral
IN M64 Common contacts Bucky and full size right lateral (+V DC)
IN M65 Contact for the fixed lateral SID -1
IN M66 Contact for the fixed lateral SID - 2
IN M67 Common contacts Bucky and full size right lateral (+V DC)
IN M69 Fluoro 2

IN M72 Common contacts of fixed lateral SIDs (+V DC)
IN M74 Fluoro 3
IN M75 Fluoro 4
IN M76 Fluoro 5
IN-AN M86 Potentiometer SID/tube-stand terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M87 Potentiometer SID/ tube-stand slider
IN-AN M88 Potentiometer SID/ tube-stand terminal (low-level 0 V DC)

IN-AN M89 Cable shielding of potentiometer SID/ table
IN-AN M90 Potentiometer SID/Table terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M91 Potentiometer SID/Table slider

IN-AN M92 Potentiometer SID/Table terminal (low-level 0 V DC)
IN-AN M93 Cable shielding of potentiometer SID/Table
IN-AN M94 Cross potentiometer/table Bucky terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M95 Cross potentiometer/table Bucky slider
IN-AN M96 Cross potentiometer/table Bucky terminal (low-level 0 V DC)
IN-AN M97 Cable Shielding of Cross potentiometer/table Bucky

IN-AN M98 Long pot./table Bucky terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M99 Long potentiometer/table Bucky slider
IN-AN M100 Long potentiometer/table Bucky terminal (low-level 0 V DC)

IN-AN M101 Cable Shielding of Long potentiometer/table
IN-AN M102 Cross potentiometer/left lateral Bucky terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M103 Cross potentiometer/ left lateral Bucky slider
IN-AN M104 Cross potentiometer/ left lateral Bucky terminal (low-level 0 V DC)
IN-AN M105 Cable Shielding of Cross potentiometer/ left lateral Bucky
IN-AN M106 Long potentiometer/left lateral Bucky terminal (high-level 5 V DC)
IN-AN M107 Long potentiometer/left lateral Bucky slider
IN-AN M108 Long potentiometer/left lateral Bucky terminal (low-level 0 V DC)
IN-AN M109 Cable Shielding of Long potentiometer/ left lateral Bucky
IN-AN M110 Cross pot./right lateral Bucky terminal (high-level 5 V DC)

IN-AN M111 Cross potentiometer/right lateral Bucky slider
IN-AN M112 Cross potentiometer/ right lateral Bucky terminal (low-level 0 V DC)
IN-AN M113 Cable Shielding of Cross potentiometer/right lateral Bucky

IN-AN M114 Long pot./right lateral Bucky terminal (high-level 5V DC)
IN-AN M115 Long potentiometer/ right lateral Bucky slider

IN-AN M116 Long potentiometer/right lateral Bucky terminal (low-level 0VDC)

IN-AN M117 Cable Shielding of Long potentiometer/right lateral Bucky
Check the Following Whenever the Potentiometer Operates Irregularly:

• The analogue signal (V DC) from the table Bucky potentiometer sliders must increase with
the increase of cassette format. Use a voltmeter to check this condition between contacts
M99 (+) and M100 (-) for the Long function and, between M95 (+) and M96 (-) for the Cross
function.
• The analogue signal (V DC) from the right lateral Bucky potentiometer sliders must
increase with the increase of cassette format. Use a voltmeter to check this condition
between contacts M115 (+) and M116 (-) for the Long function and between M111 (+) and,
M112 (-) for the Cross function.
• The analogue signal (V DC) from the left lateral Bucky potentiometer sliders must increase
with the increase of cassette format. Use a voltmeter to check this condition between
contacts M107 (+) and M108 (-) for the Long function and between M103 (+) and M104 (-)
for the Cross function.

• The analogue signal (V DC) from the table translator potentiometer slider must increase
with the decrease of the SID (as the table rises). Use a voltmeter to check this condition
between contacts M91 (+) and M92 (-).
• The analogue signal (V DC) from the stand potentiometer slider must increase with the
increase of the SID (as the stand rises). Use a voltmeter to check this condition between
contacts M87(+) and M88 (-) as the stand rises.
Using the ASR003 board, the operator is able to calibrate the collimator to the components,
see Fig. Radiology System.

Fig. Radiology System.


Calibration Start-Up
It is possible to start calibration in two manners:
Fig. 1
• Press the LIGHT (C) push button and keep
pressed while switching the collimator ON,
see Fig. 1.
• jumper J4 on the external board, see Fig.
1. The systems sees the insertion and
displays the following:
Remove Jumper to start
A D C B
A - Encoder Cross changes option and set up the
Cross cassette size.
B - Encoder Long sets up Long cassette size.
C - to confirm
D - to skip without saving
Fig. 2
By removing the jumper, the procedure starts with the calibration of the SID potentiometers.

Calibration Procedure
1. Language Selection
The display will read one of the two following messages, depending on the current language
setting.
Language
English
2. Measuring Unit - Centimetres

The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch from CENTIMETRES to INCHES.
Measuring Units
centimetres
Press LIGHT to confirm the setting; the next selection will be displayed:
3. Inclinometer Present
Inclinom. Present?
YES/NO
Please Note: When wall Bucky is present Inclinometer must be enabled.

The Encoder Cross (A) switches from Yes to NO.
Press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting.
If Inclinometer is disabled go to Vertical SID Measure section 4.
If Inclinometer is enabled, the inclinometer offset may be calibrated:
3.1. Offset Inclinometer - Sets 0° position
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE COLLIMATOR IS IN A VERTICAL POSITION (0°) WHILE ACQUIRING DATA, OTHERWISE
THE CALIBRATION WILL NOT BE VALID.
Inclinometer Offset 0°
X: xx Y: xx
xx: value read by inclinometer

yy: value read by inclinometer

3.2. Offset Inclinometer - 90° CCW
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE COLLIMATOR IS ROTATED 90° TOWARD RIGHT (CCW) WHILE ACQUIRING
DATA, OTHERWISE THE CALIBRATION WILL NOT BE VALID.
Inclinometer Offset 90 R
X: xx Y: xx

3.3. Offset Inclinometer - 90° CW
WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE COLLIMATOR IS ROTATED 90° TOWARD LEFT (CW) WHILE ACQUIRING DATA,
OTHERWISE THE CALIBRATION WILL NOT BE VALID.
Inclinometer Offset 90 L
X: xx Y: xx

3.4. Degrees Tolerance
Degrees Tolerance
XX degrees
The encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter values from 1 to 15 degrees.
3.5. Collimator Angle Visualization

Angle Visualization
Yes
The Encoder Cross (A) activates or deactivates the display of the collimator tilt angle in
degrees.

4. Vertical SID Measure

The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch between SID: SINGLE, DIFFERENTIAL, FIXED
and CAN.
• SINGLE: only one potentiometer is calibrated for SID calculation:
• Table (go to the section 4.1 and 4.1.1)
• Stand (go to the section 4.1 and 4.1.2)
• FIXED: the fixed value is set during calibration (go to the section 4.2).
• CAN: SID value is transmitted to the collimator via CANBus (go to Right Lateral Meas-
ure section 5)
• DIFFERENTIAL: both potentiometers are calibrated, one for the table and one for the
stand (go to the section 4.1.1 and 4.1.2).
Vertical SID
Meas.
4.1. Potentiometer Input

Potentiometer Input
Stand Pot/Table Pot
Indicate the potentiometer to be calibrated (table or stand)

4.1.1. Calibration of Vertical SID - Table Down
Indications displayed for the calibration of the table analogue signal require the table to be
lowered:
Move Table Down
xxx pts
The second line of the display shows the digitized voltage value generated by the table
potentiometer. The operator will lower the table. When reading is stabilized, press LIGHT (C)
to complete the setting. Should the operator wish to keep the value previously stored and
maintain the last calibration, this setting may be avoided by pressing FILTER (D).
Both instances will lead to the next measurement.
Calibration of Vertical SID - Raise Table 25 cm
Set Table at + 25 cm
xxx pts
The operator is required to place the table at the stated height. When the setting is stabilized,
press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting.
Should the operator wish to keep the value previously stored and maintain the last
calibration, this setting may be avoided by pressing FILTER (D).

Calibration of Vertical SID - Focus Table Distance
Focus Table Distance

xxx pts
The operator is required to place the table at the stated height. When the setting is stabilized,
press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting.
4.1.2. Calibration of Vertical SID - Stand All Up
Move Stand Full Up
xxx pts
The display will provide calibration indications for the stand analogue signal, requiring the
stand be raised to a higher position.
The second line of the display shows the digitized voltage value generated by the stand
potentiometer.
The operator is required to raise the stand. When the value is stabilized, press LIGHT (C) to
confirm the setting.
Calibration of Vertical SID - Lower Stand 50 cm
Lower 50 cm
xxx pts
The operator is required to place the table at the assigned height. When the value is
stabilized, press LIGHT (C) to complete the setting.
Calibration of Vertical SID - SID at 100 cm

Set stand to 100cm
xxx pts
The operator is required to set the stand at 1 m (100 cm) from the table top.
When the value is stabilized press LIGHT (C) to complete the setting

4.2. Fixed Vertical SID Value

The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to increase or decrease the SID value from 50 cm min to
300 cm max.
Vertical Fixed SID

xxx cm
Press LIGHT to confirm the setting; the next selection will be displayed (go to section 5):
5. Right Lateral SID Measure
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch between DISCRETE SID, CAN or
POTENTIOMETER.
Press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting; the next selection will be displayed:
Right Lateral SID

DISCRETE/CAN/POTENTIOMETER
• DISCRETE: lateral SID is selected via contacts on terminals M65, M66, M68, M70, M71.
• CAN: Lateral SID is transmitted to the collimator via CANBus.
• POTENTIOMETER: if SID is measured through potentiometer, the operator tilts the colli-
mator first and then calibrates the potentiometer.
• MIN RIGHT POT. SID

Minimum distance from a surface of image receptor to the film is to be set up.
Min Right Pot. SID: nnn

... cm
nnn - (value read by potentiometer).

• MAX. RIGHT POT. SID

Maximum distance from a surface of image receptor to the film is to be set up.
Max.Right Pot. SID: nnn
... cm

6. Left Lateral SID Measure

The Encoder Cross will allow to switch between DISCRETE SID, CAN or
POTENTIOMETER.
Left Lateral SID

DISCRETE/CAN/POTENTIOMETER
• DISCRETE: lateral SID is selected via contacts on terminals M65, M66, M68, M70,
M71.
• CAN: Lateral SID is transmitted to the collimator via CANBus.
• POTENTIOMETER: if SID is measured using potentiometer, the operator tilts the
collimator first and then calibrates the potentiometer.
• MIN LEFT POT. SID

Minimum distance from a surface of image receptor to the film is to be set up.
Min.Left Pot. SID: nnn
... cm
• MAX LEFT POT. SID

Maximum distance from a surface of image receptor to the film is to be set up.
Max. Left Pot.SID: nnn

... cm


7. Vertical Receptor
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch between NO, BUCKY, CAN, ATS or FIXED
FORMATS.
Vertical Receptor
NO/BUCKY/CAN/ATS/FIXED FORMATS
• NO: no receptor is connected.

• BUCKY: The receptor is a classical Bucky.
• Film Table Distance
This requests the distance from the table top to the image receptor.
The display will read the following information:
Film Table Distance

xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter values from 0 min. to 15 cm max.
• CAN: formats are CanBus related to the collimator.
• ATS: formats are CanBus related to the collimator (ATS detector mode)
• FIXED FORMATS: 5 fixed formats are selected.
• DIGITAL FORMAT # n
The display will read indications to enter the fixed measures of lateral SID. It is
possible to connect, to the external board ASR003, the inputs (max 5) that allow to
enter the fixed formats in the automatic mode.
Formato Digitale # n
AA x BB cm
AA - Cross format. The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to increase or decrease the
SID value.
BB - Long format. The Encoder Long (B) will allow to increase or decrease the SID
value.
Values will be given in inches if this was the initial setting.
Press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting; the next selection will be displayed.

8. Right Lateral Receptor

The type of lateral (right) receptor installed with the system must be selected.
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch between BUCKY, CAN, or NO.
Right Lateral Receptor

NO/BUCKY/CAN

• BUCKY: classical Bucky receptor.
• Right Film-Plane Distance
This requests distance from the receptor top to the image receptor.
The display will read the following information
Right FilmPlane Distance

xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter values from 0 min to 15 cm max.
• CAN: formats are transmitted to the collimator via CanBus.
9. Left Lateral Receptor
The type of lateral receptor (left) installed with the system must be selected. The Encoder
Cross (A) will allow to switch between BUCKY, CAN, NO.
Left Lateral Receptor

NO/BUCKY/CAN

• BUCKY: classical Bucky receptor.
• Left Film-Plane Distance
This requests the distance from the receptor top to the image receptor.
The display will read the following information
Left FilmPlane Distance

xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter values from 0 min to 15 cm max.
• CAN: formats are transmitted to the collimator via CanBus.
Press LIGHT(C) to confirm the setting; depending on the vertical SID value entered.

10. Setting of SID Horizontal # 1

The display will require the fixed values for the lateral SID to be entered.
Horiz. SID Meas. #1
xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter the measurements from 25 min to 300 cm max
Values will be given in inches if this was the initial setting.
Press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting and move forward to the to the next Lateral SID value.
Horiz. SID Meas. #2
xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter the measurements from 25 min to 300 cm max.
Horiz. SID Meas. #3
xxx cm
Horiz. SID Meas. # 4
xxx cm

Horiz. SID Meas. # 5
xxx cm
15. Setting of FULL-SIZE SID # 1
Panoramic SID #1
xxx cm
LIGHT (C) confirms the selection and passes to the next SID Panoramic value.

16. Setting of FULL-SIZE SID # 2

Panoramic SID #2
xxx cm
LIGHT (C) confirms the selection and passes to the next SID Panoramic value.
17. Calibration of Vertical SID Limits - minimum
The display will show indications of the minimum Vertical SID value accepted by the
collimator.
Vertical SID Min.
xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter the measurements from 50 cm min to 300 cm max.
18. Calibration of Vertical SID Limits - maximum
The display will show indications of the maximum Vertical SID value accepted by the
collimator.
Vertical SID Max.
xxx cm
The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to enter the measurements from 50 cm min to 300 cm max.
Press LIGHT (C) to confirm the setting; maximum Vertical SID data will be displayed.
19. SID Visualisation
SID Visualization
Yes
The Encoder Cross (A) activates or deactivates the display of the SID value on the main
window.
20. Key Status Visualization
Key Status Visual.
Yes
The Encoder Cross (A) activates or deactivates the display of the key status on the main
window (open or closed padlock).
Press LIGHT(C) to confirm the setting.

Calibrate the vertical Bucky cassettes.

The system will, otherwise, analyze the settings related to the two lateral receptors: if at least
one of the two has been programmed as analogue Bucky, the lateral left and/or right
cassettes will be calibrated.
If no Bucky was selected, the system will display the end of calibration. Cassette Calibration
Information:
The first thing the system requires is to select a quick calibration procedure or a full
calibration procedure for all types of cassettes (vertical, lateral left and lateral right).
The differences between the two calibrations are:
• Quick Cassette Calibration: the system requires to enter two cassette sizes only (one
small and one large).
• Full Cassette Calibration: the system requires to enter all possible cassette values
(max. 10 Buckys).
IE: If 3 cassette sizes are stored as 13x18, 24x30 and 30x40 cassettes, the system will
also be able to identify cassette sizes such as 13x30, 13x40, 24x18, 24x40, 30x18,
30x30.
21. Vertical Bucky Cassettes, Calibration
Table Bucky Cal.
Quick
The system starts with the calibration type.

The Encoder Cross (A) will allow to switch from Quick to Full calibration.
To cancel the procedure press FILTER (D). This keeps the last calibration values and moves
forward to the next calibration phase. The number of cassette sizes to be processed must
be entered in the event of a Full Calibration.
This step is skipped for the Quick Calibration procedure and 2 cassette values will be
processed.

Full Calibration
Set Number of
Table Buckies: xxx
xx - cassette number from 0 to 10.

Once the number is selected the cassettes need to be calibrated one by one.
Cross 1 T cm 13: XXX

Long 1 T cm 13: XXX
Cross 2 T cm 43: XXX

Long 2 T cm 43: XXX
At this point the operator may:

• Set the Cross cassette from 13 cm (“) min to 43 cm (17”) max with the Encoder
Cross (A).
• Set the Long cassette from 13 cm (“) min to 43 cm (17”) max with the Encoder
Cross (A).
When values are stabilized, confirm the setting by pressing LIGHT (C).
22. Calibration of Left Lateral Bucky Cassette
Left Bucky Cal.

Quick

processed.

Full Calibration
Set Number of
Left Side Buckie xxx

Cross 1 S cm 13: XXX

Long 1 S cm 13: XXX
Cross 2 S cm 43: XXX

Long 2 S cm 43: XXX

Cross (A).
Cross (A).
23. Calibration of Right Lateral Bucky Cassette
Right Bucky Cal.

Quick

Press LIGHT to confirm the setting.
processed.

Full Calibration
Set Number of
Right Side Buckies xxx

Cross 1 D cm 13: XXX

Long 1 D cm 13: XXX
Cross 2 D cm 43: XXX

Long 2 D cm 43: XXX

Cross (A).
Cross (A).
24. Saving Calibration Data
The system informs the operator that calibration has terminated.
End of Calibration
LIGHT per RESET
Save the setting by restarting up the collimator or pressing the push-button LIGHT (C)
RO 310 Round field collimation for image intensifier

Iris device providing round field collimation with automatic setting of the selected field. This
device is positioned roughly mid-way within the collimator housing. The field is defined by lead
iris-type shutters and is externally tangent to the maximum square field size.
Shutter movements are motorized with stepper motors; shutter positioning is potentiometer
controlled.
The round-field size may be set via CanBus (Can STEP4 board) or by analogue control via the
external board ASR003 (RO 308); its size may be reduced remotely via the two push-buttons
on the collimator front panel.
Round-field values vary from 10 cm (4”) to 60 cm (24”).

CanBus Controls
ID Type d 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note
l
c
xx0h Remote 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read Release
xx3h Remote 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read S/N
xxBh Remote 7 xx Fmin.H Fmin.L Fmax.H Fmax.L Ramp.H Ramp.L Read Dati Speed
xx1h Out 8 Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Stato A/D.H A/D.L 01h Status
xx1h Out 8 Num Adc.H Adc.L Step.H Step.L 02h Value calibration send
xx2h In 3 00h Pot.H Pot.L Home
xx2h In 7 01h Ass.HH Ass.HL Ass.LH Ass.LL Max.H Max.L Absolute
xx2h In 7 02h Rel.HH Rel.HL Rel.LH Rel.LL Max.H Max.L Relativo
xx2h In 1 03h Motor Release
xx2h In 2 04h Close Open Remote Button
xx2h In 5 FEh Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Set Position
xx2h In 1 FFh Stop
xx4h In 5 M K T D L Drive Mode
xx5h In 8 M Fmin.H Fmin.L Fmax.H Fmax.L Ramp.H Ramp.L Save Drive Speed
xx6h In 2 Opz Save Options
xxCh In 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Set S/N
xxDh In 8 00h Curr.H Curr.L CW IDLE PCurr Set Motore
xxDh In 3 01h Time.H Time.L Set Time Tx Status
xxDh In 4 02h PM.H PM.L. Flag Set Max. Steps
xxDh In 2 03h Tar Sets Calibration
xxDh In 8 04h Fmin.H Fmin.L Fmax.H Fmax.L Ramp.H Ramp.L Save Drive Speed for
Buttons
xxDh In 8 05h Num Adc.H Adc.L Step.H Step.L Set Calibration

Values
xxDh In 8 06h Num Time.L. Reads Calibration

values
MESSAGGES
STATUS
xx1h Out 8 Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Stato A/D.H A/D.L 01h Status
Controls Status Current position is transmitted every 250 ms.

Pos: Current position.
A/D: Potentiometer value
Status (bit defined)

Status:
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit 2 bit 1 bit 0
Home Por - - Mov. Man Protection Degree 0 Motor in motion
HOME
xx2h In 3 00h Pot.H Pot.L Home
Rotates mechanism to Home, motor is moving until potentiometer does not read a value
indicated by Pot.HL.
ABSOLUTE
Moves motor to specific position.
Ass.H/L: position to be reached.
Max.H/L: max. position not to be exceeded using buttons
RELATIVE
Moves motor by number of given steps (also negative).
RELEASE
Turns motor driver OFF. A new Homing control will be required to re-synch the steps.
SET POSITION
Forces microprocessor to specified position. Useful for driver without home sensor to provide
board with current motor position. Motor driver is activated.
STOP
Stops the motor.
REMOTE BUTTON
Specifies motor operation parameters.
Button: if 1 moves the motor
SET MAX STEPS
If Flag: 1 stores data in eeprom
DRIVE MODE
Specifies motor operation parameters.
M – settings mask; if bit at 1 field used is valid
- - - - Status Decay Torque Step type
K - Step Type:
03 – Full Step
04 – 1/2 Step low torque
05 – 1/2 Step high torque
06 – 1/4 Step
07 – 1/8 Step
08 – 1/16 Step
T – Torque – not used
D – Decay – defines damping to be used:
00 = 12,5%
01 = 37,5% (default)

02 = 75%
03 = 100%
L – Signal status in Home position
1 = if fork is not cut-off (=0 for ATS only)
0 = fork cut-off (=1 for ATS only)
DRIVE SPEED
Specifies motor operation speed.
M – Settings mask; if bit at 1 field used is valid
- - - Ramp Fmax Fmin
Fmin: Step frequency for motor in acceleration and braking (max 20000 Hz).
Fmax: max. Step frequency during movement (max 20000 Hz).
Ramp: time from Fmin to Fmax in ms and vice versa during acceleration and deceleration.
(max 1000ms).
OPTIONS
Sets operation of LED and offset:
- - Offset LED1 LED0 -
Offset – if at 1 output messages are shifted by 0x80.

LED1,0 – Defines Led function
00 – Home sensor status
Off with flash per second - NOT Home
ON with flash per second - Home
01 – Constant flash 1 Hz
10 - ON motor movement – OFF motor idle
11 – Incoming message via CanBus
Dis_switch - 0= enables local buttons - 1= disables local buttons
Save: = 1 stores data in Flash - =0 only temporary data
SET S/N
Sets board Serial number.
MOTOR SET
Sets mechanical parameters of the board:
PM: Max. Number of steps from home that can be used.
Curr: Motor drive current (in mA).
IDLE: Motor IDLE time (in seconds, if =0 not used). Serves to keep the motor driver using the
current specified by byte Pcurr.
PCurr:(20-100) is the percentage to be used on the work current Curr to obtain the value to be
used in IDLE.The minimum current is never set by the board at less than 200 mA.
TX STATUS SET TIME
Sets Tx Stato transmission time.
Time: in ms – Status re-transmission time with motor position.

WARNINGS
THIS IS PROVIDED AS AN AID TO THE END USER. RALCO IS NOT LIABLE FOR
ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM THE ALTERING OF PRESET FACTORY CONFIG-
URATIONS.
ADJUSTMENTS HAVE BEEN PRESET AT THE FACTORY PRIOR TO SHIPMENT OF
THE COLLIMATOR. SHOULD ANY PROBLEM ARISE REQUIRING THE NEED TO RECAL-
IBRATE, PLEASE CONTACT RALCO FOR ASSISTANCE BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH
THE ADJUSTMENT.
RO 310 Adjustments
MOTOR
• Disconnect supply
• Remove the cover, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL
• Remove the Can STEP4 board by unscrewing the 4
screws D, see Fig.1
• Remove the lateral partitions, see Fig. 2
• Unscrew the 4 screws F from the front partition and
remove the filter group, see Fig.3
• Unscrew the 4 screws G on the iris support plate, see
Fig. 1
Fig. 4
• Remove the iris support plate, see Fig. 5
• Loosen the 2 screws A on the motor support and
adjust play between the gear and the iris, see Fig.6
• Tighten the 2 screws A and remount in reverse order
POTENTIOMETER
• Remove the RSR008 board by unscrewing the 4
screws D, see Fig.1 Fig. 2
• Unscrew the 4 screws G on the iris support plate, see

Fig.4
• Remove the iris support plate, see Fig.5
• Loosen the 2 screws B on the motor support and
adjust play between the gear and the iris, see Fig.6
• Tighten the 2 screws B and remount in reverse order
SQUARE-FIELD/ROUND-FIELD ALIGNMENT
Alignment of the round/square fields is necessary, if one
of the square-field shutters is noticeable in the round
Fig. 3
field.
• Remove the RSR008 board by unscrewing the 4 screws D, see Fig.1
• Unscrew the 4 screws F from the front partition and remove the filter group, see Fig.3

• Loosen the 4 screws G on the iris support plate, see Fig.4

• Using the light-field, open the iris to 9”
• Set the square field shutters to touch the edge of
the round field
• If one of the shutters extends into the round-field,
move the iris until it is aligned with the edges of the
square-field shutters
• Tighten the 4 screws G at the base of the iris
• Remount the cover, see Chapter- COVER REMOVAL
Substitutions
MOTOR
screws D, see Fig.1
Fig. 4
• Unscrew the 4 screws G on the iris support plate,
see Fig. 4
• Unscrew the 2 screws A on the motor support
• Substitute the motor for an identical part and
remount in reverse order
POTENTIOMETER
screws D, see Fig.1 Fig. 5
• Disconnect the connector from the DC STEP4
board
• Unscrew the 4 screws F from the front partition
and remove the filter group, see Fig.3
• Unscrew the 4 screws G on the iris support plate,

see Fig. 4
• Unscrew the 2 screws B on the motor support
• Substitute the motor for an identical part and
remount in revers order.
Fig. 6
1- Step Motor, 2 - Potentiometer, 3 - Iris,

A - Step Motor Adjustment, B - Potentiometer
Adjustment

RO 314 Camera assembled internally
Analogue, color, video camera

mounted on the lower part of the
collimator for remote patient
monitoring.
Substitution of the Video Camera
• Remove the knobs by unscrewing

the 2 screws per knob.

• Unscrew the 4 screws placed on

the rails.

• Remove carefuly the snap-on front

panel and detach the connectors:
A for the push button
A
B for the front panel LED.
B

• Remove the lower cover.

• Remove the 2 lateral covers, if
necessary.
• Remove the video camera with its
support by unscrewing the fixing
screws (C).
• Detach the 2 connectors from the

video camera.

• Remount the video camera with its

support by connecting the 2
connectors and then fixing the
support to the collimator housing.
• The video camera can be adjusted

vertically (C.1) or be tilted (C.2)
whenever it is necessary.
• Power up the collimator and check

if the video camera is calibrated.

THE VIDEO CAMERA IS ALREADY WELL-FOCUSED IN THE FACTORY. PLEASE FOLLOW THE BELOW
PROCEDURE TO READJUST THE FOCUS.
• If necessary, loosen the 2 screws

(D) and rotate the whole video cam-
era to calibrate it.
• Loosen the screw E placed on the

video camera support.
• Adjust the focus by rotating the
lens.

• Loosen the screw F and adjust the

video camera inclination, if neces-
sary.
• Tighten the screws E and F.
• Remount the collimator cover in
reverse order.
RO 320 Motorized rotation of collimator

Collimator rotation, ±45°, with potentiometer to control collimator movement.
Rotation Adjustment
MOTOR
The motor for the collimator rotation is
assembled inside the collimator body and is
calibrated inhouse. If the gear with the
cogwheel on the mounting flange is not
perfect, proceed as follows:
• Remove the plate to access the adjust-

ment point, see Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
• Loosen the two screws A, move the
motor toward the collimator and check
that play between two gears is minimum.
• Tighten the two screws A, see Fig. 1.
• Tighten the 2 screws C on the gear if the
motor is running while the collimator Fig. 1
does not move or loosen the 2 screws C
if the gear does not run at the end of
stroke.

POTENTIOMETERS
The potentiometer that controls collimator position is assembled inside the collimator body and
is calibrated inhouse. If the gear with the cogwheel on the mounting flange is not perfect,
proceed as follows:
• Loosen the two screws B move the potentiometer toward the collimator and check that play
between the two gears is minimum.
• Tighten the two screws B, see Fig. 2.
Motorized Rotation Substitution
MOTOR
• Disconnect supply to the collimator.
• Remove the plate to access the adjustment
point, see Chapter - COVER REMOVAL.
• Loosen the two screws D and remove the part.
The friction support is glued to the motor shaft;
this means that the motor, friction and support
need to be substituted.
• Tighten the screws D and adjust play between
gears, see Chapter - ADJUSTMENTS.
• Fasten the two screws D, see Fig. 3.
Fig. 2
POTENTIOMETER
• Remove the plate to access the adjustment
point, see Chapter - COVER REMOVAL.
• Unsolder electrical wires and mark polarity.
• Unscrew the two screws E.
• Remove the gear from F.
• Remount the gear.
• Remount the support and adjust play between
gears, see Chapter - ADJUSTMENTS.
• Fasten screws E, see Fig. 3.
Fig. 3
FOR THE CORRECT CONNECTION OF THE

CAN-STEP4 BOARD REFERS TO THE COLLI-
MATOR WIRING.
CanBus Controls
xx0h Remote 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read Release
xx3h Remote 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Read S/N
xxBh Remote 7 xx Pmin.H Pmin.L Pmax.H Pmax.L Ramp.H Ramp.L Read Dati Speed
xx1h Out 7 Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Stato A/D.H A/D.L Status

xx2h In 5 01h Ass.HH Ass.HL Ass.LH Ass.LL Absolute
xx2h In 5 02h Rel.HH Rel.HL Rel.LH Rel.LL Relative
Muove_vs_Min
xx2h In 4 05h Pwm Time.H Timer.L
(debug)
Muove_vs_Max
xx2h In 4 06h Pwm Time.H Timer.L
(debug)
xx2h In 1 FFh Stop
xx4h In 3 01h SwMin SwMax Switch_Remote
xx5h In 8 M Pmin.H Pmin.L Pmax.H Pmax.L Ramp.H Ramp.L CW Drive_Speed
xx6h In 1 Opz Options
xxAh In 5 01h Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Set_Pos_Min
xxAh In 5 02h Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Set_Pos_Media
xxAh In 5 03h Pos.HH Pos.HL Pos.LH Pos.LL Set_Pos_Max
xxAh In 5 04h Vel.H Vel.L Brk.H Brk.L Set_Vel_&_Brake
xxAh In 1 05h Set_Pot_Min
xxAh In 1 06h Set_Pot_Max
xxCh 8 xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx Set_S/N
xxDh In 3 01h Time.H Time.L Set_Time_Tx_Stato
xxFh In 5 01h Id.H Id.L Sp.H Sp.L Set ID e speed
xxFh In 2 FFh Sys Set system
Status
Status message is sent repeatedly in two ways:
If the motor is running, the message is transmitted every few ms defined by message Set Time
Tx.
If the motor is idle, the message is sent every one second.
Pos: position in degrees *10 (degrees are expressed in decimal system).
Status
bit defined
bit 7 bit 6 bit 5 bit 4 bit 3 bit2 bit 1 bit 0
Home - - - Alarm Protection Triggered
Home: = 1 if the collimator is in min. position.

Alarm: Alarm is ON if the movement control was performed but the potentiometer does not
move. The alarm is ON also if position has not been reached within the set time. The alarm is
not enabled in manual movements: Move forward and Move backward.
A/D: A/D converter value read by the potentiometer.
Absolute
Moves motor to specified position.
Relative
Moves motor by number of given steps (also negative).

Muove_vs_Min control moves the collimator toward min. position (es. -45°).
Muove_vs_Max control moves the collimator toward max. position (es. +45°).
Pwm: power applied to motor 0 = idle 255 = max
Time: motor working time (in ms)
Stop
Stops the motor.
Switch_Remote
Repeats the switch remote status.
SwMin: rotates the collimator toward min. position (0=not pressed, 0xFF= pressed).
SwMax: rotates the collimator toward max. position (0=not pressed, 0xFF=pressed).
Drive_Speed
Specifies motor working speed.
M- settings, if bit at 1 the inserted field is valid.
- - - - CW Rampa Pmax Pmin
Pmin: PWM min. to use at motor start-up (0-255).

Pmax. max. PWM applicable (0-255).
Ramp: in ms, time used to switch Pmin to Pmax and vice versa during acceleration and
deceleration. (max 1000 ms).
CW: (0/1) inverts direction clockwise and counterclockwise.
Options
Sets operation of LED and offset:
Options
:
- - - - Offset LED1 LED0 Dis_switch
Offset – if at 1 output messages are shifted by 0x80.

LED1,0 – Defines LED function.

00 – Home sensor status.
Off with flash per second - NOT Home.
ON with flash per second - Home.
01 – Constant flash 1 Hz.
10 - ON motor movement – OFF motor idle.
11 – Incoming message via CanBus.
Dis_switch 0= enables local keys 1- disables local keys.
Set_Pos_Minima
Set_Pos_Media
Set_Pos_Massima
These controls are used to set both potentiometer in correct position and relative degrees.
When control is sent the cpu reads the potentiometer value and stores into parameters together
with received degrees by the same control.

Pos: the sent degrees correspond to current position. Degrees to be sent are multiplied by 10,
considering tenths of a degree.
ie. to send +45°, +450 is dispatched, in Hex 0x000001C2
ie. to send -45°, -450 is dispatched, in Hex 0xFFFFFE3E
Set_Vel_&_Brake
Set the rotation speed in degrees (always multiplied by 10) on the highest motor power.
Set also the motor braking time.
To stop motor invert the rotation for specified time.
Spe: Speed in °/sec. x 10.
Brk: braking time in ms.
Set_Pot_Max
Set max potentiometer excursion (stores the converter A/D value read at the message
sending).
S/N setting
Set the board S/N.
Status Time Tx Stato
Set transmission time Tx Status.
Time: in ms - time of Status re-transmission with motor position.
CANBUS AND ID CONFIGURATION
Boards have default values which are loaded at first power-up. These values need to be varied
to provide correct system operation.
The first thing to be set is the CanBus ID address and velocity of each board. Jumper JP4 is
used for the purpose.
By inserting the Jumper, CanBus speed is momentarily set at 500 Kbits/sec.
Set ID and Speed
ID Type dlc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note
Set ID e
xxFh In 5 01h Id.H Id.L Sp.H Sp.L
Speed
Id: assigned CanBus ID§

Note: ID 7F0h not used.

Sp: CanBus Speed in Kbit/sec (10, 20, 50, 100, 125, 150, 250, 500, 800, 1000)
System Type
ID Type dlc 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note
xxFh In 2 FFh Sys Set sistema
Sys: to be defined
Calibration of Rotation Position
To calibrate the rotation position it is necessary to proceed as follows:
• Loosen the fixing screws of the potentiometer.
• Position the collimator at 0° (central position).
• Rotate the potentiometer shaft by hand from minimum to maximum to check the value on
the display at position A/D:yyy.

• Rotate the potentiometer until the maximum value divided by 2 is read.

• Tighten the potentiometer screws.
• Switch on the collimator by keeping the filter and rotation (+45°) push buttons pressed.
• Release the push buttons when the collimator starts a configuration.
• Wait for the message "Wait command" that appears on the display.
• Press the filter push button; a readout similar to the following string will appear on the
screen:
-45 Gr: xxxx A/D:yyyy
where:
xxxx = collimator position in degrees.
yyyy = potentiometer reading.
• Rotate the collimator to position “-45° “ by using the rotation push buttons.
• Press the lamp push button to confirm. The display reads the number -450 at position
Gr.: xxxx.
• Rotate the collimator to position “0°” by using the rotation push buttons.
• Press the filter push button to position “0°” in the menu.
• Press the lamp push button to confirm. The display reads “0” at position Gr.:xxxx.
• Rotate the collimator to position “+45°” by using the rotation push buttons.
• Press the filter push button to “+ 45°” in the menu.
• Press the Lamp push button to confirm. The display reads “+450” at position Gr.:xxxx..
At this point the rotation is calibrated
RE-POSITION THE POTENTIOMETER ONLY IF STRICTLY NECESSARY.
Self - positioning
At start-up the collimator does not position itself. A self-repositioning function is enabled
internally by sending the message via Canbus or pressing the push button of the rotation.
In practice, if for some external problem the board should detect the different position from the
last one, the motor will automatically restore a correct position.
RO 329 Internal Proximity Sensor

A proximity sensor is a sensor able to detect the minimum distance to a patient without any
physical contact, thereby avoiding the risk of collision.
The proximity sensor emits an inferred beam and register a return signal if utilized correctly.
The minimum distance that this sensor detects is 30 cm. A shorter distance will generate
alarms to be managed by the X-ray system and end user.
WARNING

THE LIABILITY FOR THE CORRECT SENSOR FUNCTIONING DEVOLVES

UPON THE END USER AND/OR THE X-RAY EQUIPMENT
MANUFACTURER.
Fig. Minimum distance patient/X-ray focus
Connection
The 12 V supply is to be drawn from connector J10; the output signal is to be connected to pin
2 of connector J12. A resistor, 10 Kohm 1/4 W, is to be mounted between pins 2 and 3 on
connector J12. See Fig. 1 for the wiring diagram of the sensor.
Calibration
The two switches on the sensor front serve as reference
Sensor Calibration
• Rotate the Light/Dark switch to LIGHT ON to activate the sensor when the object is in
measuring range.
• Set the object at the required detection distance and adjustment the sensitivity switch by
increasing the potentiometer until the orange LED light is lit.
• Remove the object and set sensitivity half-way between the detected point and maximum
potentiometer value.

WARNING
MAKE SURE THAT THE PROXIMITY SENSOR IS WORKING PROPERLY.

AN IMPROPER USE OF THE PROXIMITY SENSOR MIGHT CAUSE
HARM TO THE PATIENT.
WARNING
RALCO REFUSES TO ACCEPT ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES IN

THE EVENT OF FAILED OR IMPROPER OPERATION OF THE DEVICE.
RO 330 Connecting cable extension

Connecting cable extension; Longer cable is provided for your system.
RO 332/A Resin Rotating Mounting Flange
Resin rotating mounting flange with fixing

screws:
• 15 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to the chapter

INSTALLATION in this Instruction Manual
for the correct flange/collimator mounting
instructions.
RO 337 Mechanical arrangement for digital camera assembling
Mechanical adaptation for the

accommodation of a patient monitoring video

camera (camera not supplied).

RO 344 Accessory guide rail spacers with reinforced support
Pair of plastic rail guides (RAL 9003) on

metal support designed to accommodate
the ionization chamber and allow the
insertion of relative filter (153 mm +/- 0.5).
RO 356 Shutter position verified by potentiometer
Supplementary safety device to ensure correct

positioning of shutters. It consists of two
potentiometers mounted on the collimator: One is
mounted on the back of the collimator to control
the Long shutters and the other potentiometer is
mounted on the side to control the Cross shutters.
The output signal is managed by a customer.
RO 409 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange
Resin rotating mounting flange milled to

form a square:
• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 0° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Option includes three (3) iron mounting
flange spacers also milled to form a
square: 1.5 mm thickness.
Please refer to the chapter

INSTALLATION in this Instruction
Manual for the correct flange/collimator
mounting instructions.

RO 428 Touchscreen Display
The collimator front panel is without knobs

and a touchscreen pannel is added, allowing
to control filter, light and shutter position.
DFF/SID is also displayed.
RO 436 Reduction of housing height
Modified housing providing a lower

collimator (DAP may not be mounted
internally).
Collimator cover dimensions: 191 x
244 x 282 cm

Resin rotating mounting flange:

• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 50° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to the chapter INSTALLATION

in this Instruction Manual for the correct
flange/collimator mounting instructions.


• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter


RO 444 Can Open Protocol
Software that controls the collimator functions via CanOpen protocol.
RO 445 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange
Metal rotating mounting flange:

• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 90° mechanical stop
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to the chapter INSTALLATION in this Instruction Manual for the correct flange/
collimator mounting instructions.
When the collimator is assembled check the collimator to Focal Spot Alignment
(Primary Shutter Cut-Off).

Inspect the four images of the four collimator shutters which form the edges of the X-ray
field. A definitely indistinct edge indicates that the primary shutter, close to the focal spot, is
the one forming the line, rather than the outermost shutter.
To correct the condition, use the four mounting/centering adjustment screws to shift the
collimator in the direction of the indistinct line. Repeat the test film exposure after making
the adjustment.
NOTE

THE HEEL EFFECT WILL CAUSE THE FIELD TOWARD THE CATHODE TO BE
SLIGHTLY LESS SHARP THAN ON THE OTHER THREE SIDES. THIS IS NORMAL
AND CANNOT BE CORRECTED BY ADJUSTMENT. IN ADDITION, AN X-RAY TUBE
OF 12° OR LESS TARGET ANGLE WILL PRODUCE AN ASYMMETRICALLY SHAPED
FIELD WHEN A LARGE FIELD SIZE IS USED AT SHORT SID, BECAUSE OF ANODE
CUT-OFF EFFECT. THIS IS NORMAL AND MAY NOT BE CORRECTED BY
ADJUSTMENT.
RO 452 Manual-Image Stitching on LONG Shutters

Each single Long shutter is moving through a knob on the front panel.
This specialized system allows the user to manually adjust and fine-tune the stitch position.
During the manual-stitching process, alignment of the Potter Bucky with the X-ray beam is
manually performed for each exposure.
The X-ray tube remains stationary throughout the entire process. The acquired number of
exposures is 3 at 100 cm SID.
NOTE
THE FRONT PANEL SHOWS THE 2 INDEX SCALES THAT ALLOWS THE COLLIMATOR
TO OPERATE EITHER IN THE STANDARD OR STITCHING MODE. SEE FIG. INDEX
SCALE - STANDARD MODE AND FIG. INDEX SCALE - STITCHING MODE.
THE MAXIMUM COLLIMATOR APERTURE IN THE STITCHING MODE IS 43 X 43
CM AT 100 CM SID.
Fig. Index Scale - Standard Mode Fig. Index Scale - Stitching Mode


• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 90° with mechanical stop
• 136 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 492 Adjustable Top-Cover Bracket in this chapter of the
Instruction Manual for the correct flange/collimator mounting instructions..
RO 470 High precision ball bearing shutter movement
A linear guideway permits linear movement with

the aid of rolling elements. By using balls or
rollers between the rail and block, a linear
guideway can attain an extremely precise linear
movement. Compared with a standard sliding

guide, the friction coefficient here is just one
fiftieth.
PROPERTIES AND ADVANTAGES:
• High positioning accuracy
• Long lifetime and highly precise movement
Fig. Linear guideway
• High speed and low driving force
• Same high load capacity in all directions
SUBSTITUTION OF LINEAR GUIDEWAYS MUST BE EXCLUSIVELY PERFORMED IN RALCO.

RO 481 Internal Rotating Square Field

Two pairs of rectangular lead shutters (Long and Cross), moving jointly, both rotating +/- 360°
by means of three stepper motors. The motorized movement of its shutters permits
adjustment of the X-Ray field to the area under investigation.
This option is not available with RO 310 or RO 344.

• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 45° detent
• 140 mm diameter


Metal rotating mounting flange with

countersunk mounts:
• 18 mm thickness
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 492 Adjustable

Top-Cover Bracket in this chapter of the
Instruction Manual for the correct flange/
collimator mounting instructions.
This flange is ONLY available with RO 492.
RO 492 Adjustable Top-Cover Bracket
This accessory has been designed to precisely install the collimator with a 136mm diameter
metal flange (not included) to the X-ray tube.
WARNINGS

BE USED.



Installation
TUBE COMPATIBILITY



mounting flange (if purchased) from their
packaging.
Installation.
Installation.

thickness is the same.

Mounting the Flange to the X-ray Tube
NOTE

FLANGES WITH THIS OPTIONAL ITEM. IF YOU ARE UNSURE THE MOUNTING FLANGE
YOUR COLLIMATOR IS EQUIPPED WITH IS COMPATIBLE, PLEASE CONSULT YOUR
PERSONALIZATION PAGE PROVIDED WITH THIS MANUAL TO LOCATE THE FLANGE
PART NUMBER (RO REFERENCE). FOLLOW THE MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS SET
FORTH UNDER THE SPECIFIC RO REFERENCE IN THIS MANUAL.
WARNING


CAUTION


screws.**

When in doubt please contact X-ray tube



CAUTION
0.45 NM OF FORCE.
Alignment of X-Ray Tube Focus and Collimator

Alignment Device

image.
position of the focus. Should the use of an alignment Fig. Focal Alignment Device
device not be possible, Ralco collimators allow for
the regulation of the light field.

NOTE

WARNINGS




TO ENSURE THE PROPER FUNCTIONING OF THE COLLLIMATOR AND FLANGE. LIABILITY



Screws.
CAUTION

Fig. 4 Mounting Screws
3. With the tabs fully retracted, the hexagonal

socket screws of the mounting bracket must
be tightening equally up to the end stroke
with 0.45 Nm torque (at least 7 turns), see
Fig. Mounting Bracket.
4. The 4 tabs of the hexagonal socket screws
overlap on the flange outer ring in the same
manner.
5. The collimator tabs adhere to the flange
outer ring. Depending on the optional flange
purchased, the collimator may rotate or be
fixed (no rotation).
6. Once the collimator is coupled to the flange
in the method described above, verify the
distance between the collimator housing and

the mounting flange is equal in all directions
and the collimator face is parallel to the axis
of the table. Loosen the screws and adjust
Fig. Mounting Bracket
as necessary. *illustrative purpose only
7. The collimator should be coupled to the
flange firmly. If the collimator is loose, please repeat the above mounting instructions, and if

Verification of Correct Installation
WARNING

FALLING EXISTS. ENSURE THE FOLLOWING, AS IN EACH SCENARIO BELOW SERIOUS
Overlap.
Overlap.

RO 495 Camera assembled internally for patient monitoring
An IP ethernet interface is a type of digital camera commonly employed for surveillance, and
which, unlike analog closed circuit television (CCTV) cameras, can send and receive data
via a computer network and the Internet.

Substitution of the Video Camera
• Remove the knobs by unscrewing the 2

screws per knob.
• Unscrew the 4 screws placed on the rails.


• Remove carefully the snap-on front panel and

detach the connectors:
A for the push button
A
B for the front panel LED (if present).
B

• Remove the lower cover.

• Remove the 2 lateral covers, if
necessary.
• Remove the video camera with its support by
unscrewing the fixing screws (C).
• Detach the connectors from the video cam-

era, as shown in the photos.

• Remount the video camera with its support by

connecting the connectors and then fixing the
support to the collimator housing.
• The video camera can be adjusted vertically

(C.1) or be tilted (C.2) whenever it is neces-
sary.
• Power up the collimator and check if the

video camera is calibrated.

THE VIDEO CAMERA IS ALREADY WELL-FOCUSED IN THE FACTORY. PLEASE FOLLOW THE BELOW
PROCEDURE TO READJUST THE FOCUS.
• If necessary, loosen the 2 screws (D) and

rotate the whole video camera to calibrate it.
• Loosen the screw E placed on the video cam-

era support.
• Adjust the focus by rotating the lens.

• Loosen the screw F and adjust the video

camera inclination, if necessary.
• Tighten the screws E and F.
• Remount the collimator cover in reverse
order.
RO 498 Self-Centering Top-Cover Bracket with Zero Position Output Signal
Zero position (+/-3°) output signal is provided by a microswitch with signal being managed
by the customer.
Installation
WARNINGS

BE USED.


TUBE COMPATIBILITY


Installation.
Installation.




NOTE

WARNING

CAUTION



screws.**

When in doubt please contact X-Ray tube


CAUTION

CAUTION
0.45 NM OF FORCE.

ALIGNMENT DEVICE

image.

NOTE

WARNINGS






1. Prepare the collimator to be installed by unscrewing the 4 hexagonal socket screws until
the four tabs are completely withdrawn form the collimator top mounting plane, see Fig. 4
Mounting Screws.
2. Ensure the microswitch is completely retracted, see Fig. Microswitch.
Fig. Microswitch Fig. 4 Mounting Screws
CAUTION
WHEN UNSCREWING THE HEXAGONAL SOCKET SCREW WHICH CONTROL THE TABS,
DO NOT USE FORCE EXCEEDING 0,45 NM.
UNSCREW WITH CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE HEXAGONAL SCREW HEAD AND TABS.


tightened completely up to the end stroke
with 0.45Nm of torque (at least 7 turns), see
tightened exactly 5 ½ turns, see Fig. Mount-
ing Bracket.
5. If you are not able to respect the turns some-
thing is incorrect, repeat above instructions,
if issues persist, please contact Ralco.
6. Ensure the microswitch is completely
engaged by tightening the set screw, see
Fig. Microswitch.
7. The collimator tabs glide on the flange outer
ring and the collimator rotates towards the X-
ray tube axis. If, however:
• The release force from the position 0° *illustrative purpose only
and the collimator rotation is too low,
the two tabs of the tab 2 and 4 need to
be tightened ½ turn.
• The release force from the position 0° and the collimator rotation is too high, the two
tabs of the tab 2 and 4 need to be loosened ½ turn.
WARNING

Overlap.
Overlap.

RO 499 Resin Rotating Mounting Flange with Position Indicator
This accessory is a part of the position

control system designed to indicate the
collimator 0° position (+/- 3°) through a
microswitch.

• 20 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 498 Auto-

Centering Top-Cover Bracket in this
chapter of the Instruction Manual for the
correct flange/collimator mounting

instructions.
RO 502 Camera assembled internally for patient monitoring
The USB camera with CMOS image sensor delivers excellent image quality and accuracy in
color reproduction, even in the harshest ambient light conditions. The camera is completely
integrated with the collimator thanks to its lightweight, compact design,15 fps at full resolution
(2592 x 1944 px) and embedded power supply.

RO 518 Additional Variable Filtration
Additional variable filtration may be added to the minimum collimator filtration in the form of
the 4 position rotating wheel with selectable filters (clockwise): (1) empty or (2) 0.1mm
Cu+1mm Al or (3) 0.1mm Cu+0.5mm Al or (4) 0.5mm Cu+1mm Al.

• 17 mm thickness
• 0° detent
• 140 mm diameter



• 15 mm thickness
• 140 mm diameter

RO 544 7” Touchscreen Display
A full colour display which allows an operator to configure the collimator parameters, control
the X-ray system and preview an examination via Ethernet in real time (not available with RO
436)
Characteristics:
• Full colour display
• Diagonal Screen Size 7” or 4.3”
• Format 16:9
• Resolution 800x480 pixel
• Custom graphic and colours to meet all needs.
Functionality
All touch screen applications for a normal use are included in a single page.The display,
however, has been designed to add additional pages for future requests.The icon view on the
display adapts accordingly to the collimator inclination (vertical/lateral). This change occurs
when the collimator rotates by 45 degrees and is measured by a built-in tilt sensor.
The touch screen menu:

• 1 - System configuration
• 2 - ON/OFF
• 3 - Filter change
• 4 - SID
• 5 - Pre-set Format
• 6 - Collimator Status
• 7 - Proximity Sensor
• 8 - Iris closed
• 9 - Iris opened

Electrical connection





EMC COMPLIANCE
Electromagnetic Emissions
The R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS colimator is suitable for use in the specified electromagnetic environment. The purchaser
or user of the R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS should assure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described
below:
Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment- Guidance

RF emissions Group 1 The Collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS needs special
CISPR 11 precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and put
into service according to the EMC report.
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect
the collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS.
RF emissions Class [A]

This R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS is suitable for use in all
CISPR 11 establishments other than domestic and those directly connected
to the low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings
Harmonic distortion [Not applicable]
used for domestic purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Limitation of Voltage Fluctuation [Not applicable]

This R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS is not suitable to be
and Flicker
connected to other equipments.
IEC 61000-3-3
Electromagnetic Immunity for All Equipment and Systems
Immunity IEC 60601 Test Complian Electromagnetic Environment

Test Level ce Level
Electrostatic 8 kV contact EN 60601-1-2 Hospital
discharge (ESD) 15 kV air test level
IEC 61000-4-2

Electromagnetic Immunity
The R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS collimator is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of the collimator should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Immunity Test IEC 60601 Test Complian Electromagnetic

Level ce Level Environment
Portable and mobile RF
communications equipment should be
used no closer to any part of the R 225
ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS, including
cables, then the
recommended separation distance
calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the
transmitter.
Recommended Separation Distance
Radiated RF 3V 3 V/m d=1.2 √P 80 MHz to 800MHz d=2.3

IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2,5 GHz √P 800 MHz to 2.5GHz
Where P is the maximum output power

rating of the transmitter in watts (W)
according to the transmitter
manufacturer and d is the
recommended separation distance in
metres (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF

transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey, should be
less than the compliance level in each
frequency range.
Interference may occur
in the vicinity of
equipment marked with
the following symbol:

Recommended Separation Distances for Non-Life Supporting Equipment

Collimator R 225 ACS - R 225 ACS DHHS is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the collimator can help prevent electromagnetic interference by
maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the collimator
as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter

Rated Maximum Output (m)
Power of Transmitter
W 150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2,5 GHz
d= 1.2 x √P d = 1.2 x √P d 0 2.3 x √P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in metres (m) can
be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
RO 545 Front silkscreen with six double-safety touch buttons

This accessory has bee designed for collimator control and customer remote control
movement (only available with RO 544)


• 20 mm thickness
• 140 mm diameter
• Fixation plate 4 mm
• Rotation force 1.6kg +/- 0.4 /
release force 3.5kg +/- 0.5

RO 570 Shutter position verified by encoders

Supplementary safety device to ensure correct positioning of shutters. It consists of two
encoders mounted on the collimator.

RO 575 Iron Mounting Flange Spacer
This accessory is used for the mounting

flange; 1 mm thickness.
RO 587/2 Two lasers (one mounted externally) forming a crosshair to center the patient
to the collimator: Class 1
Second laser which serves to center
the patient using the cross projection.
The collimator lasers are classified as
Class 1 (1 m W - wavelength = 645
mm, +/- 10 nm) and are used for
collimator/image receptor center
alignment.

SYSTEM DO NOT STARE
INTO THE BEAM.
CALIBRATION CONTROL
• Draw a cross (two lines at 90°) on
a sheet of paper and use this as
reference.
• Switch the light ON and set the sheet of paper at 1 m from the focus.

• Make sure the cross on the paper coincides exactly with the two lines silk-screened on the
plastic window.
• Examine the laser projections on the paper: the laser is
correctly calibrated when the projections coincide with the
lines drawn on the paper, otherwise an adjustment will be
necessary.
ADJUSTMENT
Horizontal
• Disconnect the collimator supply. Collimator
• Remove the laser cover located on the collimator cover by crosshair
unscrewing the two screws A, see Fig. Horizontal Laser. projection
• To correct horizontal misalignment, loosen the screws B,
see Fig. Horizontal Laser and move the laser support
Laser line
until the projected laser line coincides with the cross on
projection
the sheet of paper. Tighten screws B.
Vertical
• Disconnect power supply. Fig. Laser Projections
• Remove the knobs and front panel, see Chapter- COVER
REMOVAL.
• To correct vertical misalignment, loosen the Allen screw A, see Fig. Vertical Laser on the
laser support; rotate the laser and align the laser line over the cross on the sheet of paper.
• To move laterally the laser loosen the screws B and shift the laser support until the
projected laser line coincides with the cross on the sheet of paper.
• Tighten B screw s.
WARNINGS
DO NOT APPLY EXCESSIVE FORCE TO THE SCREW. THE LASER SHELL IS IN

PLASTIC AND EXCESSIVE PRESSURE COULD CRACK THE PLASTIC AND POSSIBLY
SHORT-CIRCUIT THE LASER.
SUBSTITUTION
The Laser Substitution Kit is composed of the following components: the lase (A), the extension
cable (B) and the laser label (C) pictured below in Fig. Laser Substitution Kit. This Kit is
designed to substitute any laser Ralco provides.

Fig. Laser Substitution Kit
Prior to replacing the laser, confirm which version of laser is installed on your collimator which
• The previous laser version is connected to the board via 2 cables (red and white), see Fig.
Previous Laser Version below.
Fig. Previous Laser Version
• The new laser is connected to the board via the connector, see Fig. New Laser Version
below.
Fig. New Laser Version
Replacing the Previous Laser Version

To replace the previous version of laser, all components of the Laser Substitution Kit (RS 2589)
(A, B and C) must be used.
model.

• Prior to disconnecting the laser cables from the board, identify the cables and their position
• Ensure the extension cable (B) is firmly connected to the laser (A), see Fig. Laser Substi-
tution Kit above.
• Adjust the length of the extension (B) cable by cutting the 2 cables (red/white).
• Connect both cables to the board.
• Verify the Laser alignment, see Chapter ADJUSTMENT or OPTIONAL ITEMS in the Instruction
Replacing the New Laser Version
To replace the new laser version, only part A and C of the Kit must be used.
model.
• Detach the connector of the faulty laser from the collimator wiring.
• Connect the new laser to the collimator wiring.
• Verify the Laser alignment, see Chapter ADJUSTMENT or OPTIONAL ITEM in the Instruction



microswitch.

• 17 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter

instructions.

RO 603 Shutter blocking screws
The 2 shutter locking screws with warning labels for

protection during shipment.

microswitch.

• 20 mm thickness
• 0° detent
• 140 mm diameter


instructions.
RO 609 Self-Centering Top-Cover Bracket with Zero Position Output Signal

Zero position (+/-3°) output signal is provided by a microswitch with signal being managed by
the customer.

Installation
WARNINGS

BE USED.


TUBE COMPATIBILITY


Installation.
Installation.


NOTE


WARNING


CAUTION


screws.**

When in doubt please contact X-Ray tube



CAUTION
0.45 NM OF FORCE.

ALIGNMENT DEVICE

image.

Mounting the Collimator to the Resin Flange (RO 610 or RO 619)
NOTE

WARNINGS






1. Prepare the collimator to be installed by unscrewing the 4 hexagonal socket screws until
the four tabs are completely withdrawn form the collimator top mounting plane, see Fig. 4
Mounting Screws.
2. Ensure the microswitch is completely retracted, see Fig. Microswitch.
Fig. Microswitch Fig. 4 Mounting Screws
CAUTION
WHEN UNSCREWING THE HEXAGONAL SOCKET SCREW WHICH CONTROL THE TABS,
DO NOT USE FORCE EXCEEDING 0,45 NM.
UNSCREW WITH CARE SO AS NOT TO DAMAGE THE HEXAGONAL SCREW HEAD AND TABS.


tightened completely up to the end stroke
with 0.45Nm of torque (at least 7 turns), see
tightened exactly 5 ½ turns, see Fig. Mount-
ing Bracket.
5. If you are not able to respect the turns some-
thing is incorrect, repeat above instructions,
if issues persist, please contact Ralco.
6. Ensure the microswitch is completely
engaged by tightening the set screw, see
Fig. Microswitch.
7. The collimator tabs glide on the flange outer
ring and the collimator rotates towards the X-
ray tube axis. If, however:
• The release force from the position 0° *illustrative purpose only
and the collimator rotation is too low,
the two tabs of the tab 2 and 4 need to
be tightened ½ turn.
• The release force from the position 0° and the collimator rotation is too high, the two
tabs of the tab 2 and 4 need to be loosened ½ turn.
Mounting the Collimator to the Metal Flange (RO 611)
NOTE

WARNINGS


WARNINGS



TO ENSURE THE PROPER FUNCTIONING OF THE COLLLIMATOR AND FLANGE. LIABILITY


Screws.
CAUTION

Fig. 4 Mounting Screws

3. With the tabs fully retracted, the hexagonal

socket screws of the mounting bracket must
be tightening equally up to the end stroke
with 0.45 Nm torque (at least 7 turns), see
4. The 4 tabs of the hexagonal socket screws
overlap on the flange outer ring in the same
manner.
5. The collimator tabs adhere to the flange
outer ring. Depending on the optional flange
purchased, the collimator may rotate or be
fixed (no rotation).
6. Once the collimator is coupled to the flange
in the method described above, verify the
distance between the collimator housing and
the mounting flange is equal in all directions
and the collimator face is parallel to the axis
of the table. Loosen the screws and adjust
as necessary. *illustrative purpose only
7. The collimator should be coupled to the
flange firmly. If the collimator is loose, please repeat the above mounting instructions, and if
WARNING

Overlap.
Overlap.


microswitch.

• 17 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 609 Self-


instructions.

RO 611 Metal Rotating Mounting Flange with Position Indicator
This accessory is a part of the position control system designed to indicate the collimator 0°
position (+/- 3°) through a microswitch.

• 18 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 609 Self-Centering Top-Cover Bracket in this chapter of the
Instruction Manual for the correct flange/collimator mounting instructions.


microswitch.

• 15 mm thickness
• +/- 90° detent
• 140 mm diameter
Please refer to section RO 609 Self-

instructions.

MAINTENANCE
To ensure constantly safe performance of the collimator and its compliance with applicable
regulations, a maintenance program is indispensable.
It is the Owner's responsibility to supply or arrange for this service.
CLEANING RECOMMENDATIONS
• The collimator housing must be cleaned as prescribed by the sanitary regulations followed
by the operator.
• Use non abrasive cleaning products.
Care must be taken to prevent liquid from entering the collimator. Please Note: The colli-
mator cover is not watertight.
• Do not reapply power if inflammable liquids have leaked into the collimator.
See the following Maintenance Instructions.
• Clean the varnished and aluminium surfaces with a damp cloth only, using a neutral
cleansing agent then dry the surfaces with a soft cloth.
• Clean chrome surfaces with a dry soft cloth.
CAUTION
DO NOT SPRAY WATER OR DETERGENT DIRECTLY OVER THE COLLIMATOR. THE

UNIT’S LIQUID PROTECTION LEVEL IS IPX0.
DISINFECTION
The disinfection method use must conform with the currently applicable norms and directives
covering disinfection and protection against explosion hazards.
CAUTION
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Maintenance
NEVER USE CAUSTIC SUBSTANCES, SOLVENTS OR ABRASIVE DETERGENTS.

IF PRODUCTS THAT COULD FORM EXPLOSIVE GAS MIXTURES ARE USED, ALLOW
THE GAS TO EVAPORATE BEFORE STARTING THE SYSTEM.
• Disinfect the unit including accessories and cables with a dampened cloth.
• Do not spray the unit with the disinfectant because it could leak into the collimator.
RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE PROGRAM

Ralco suggests a yearly servicing program, however shorter intervals are advisable when the
collimator is subject to heavy workloads.
• Re-calibration of the collimator will be necessary whenever the X-ray tube is changed or at
each substitution of the source light (lamp or LED, if assembled) used to simulate the light
field.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS MAINTENANCE

• Calibration procedures (if provided) must be performed as described in this manual.

• Check once a week that the screws and tabs which serve to secure the collimator to the
flange/tube adapter are correctly tightened.
• Remove the covers and panels from collimator. Inspect the moving parts for signs of wear
or damage.
• Check the electric system and substitute parts that show wear.
• Check the plastic anti-dust window and substitute it if necessary.
• Clean the collimator with a soft cloth paying particular attention to the plastic anti-dust win-
dow. Do not use abrasive or inflammable cleaning products.
• Wipe away all excess oil and remount the cover.
CAUTION
MAKE SURE TO TIGHTEN THE ALLEN SCREWS SECURING THE COLLIMATOR OR THE
CONTROL TABS.
APPROPRIATE TIGHTENING OF THE 4 ALLEN SCREWS ENSURES SECURE MOUNTING
OF THE COLLIMATOR. TIGHTENING FORCE USED MUST NOT EXCEED 0.50 NM.
NOTE
IF THE COLLIMATOR IS TO BE MOUNTED ON A ROTATING FLANGE, USE A TIGHTENING

FORCE BETWEEN MIN. 0,50 NM AND MAX. 0.75 NM.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - Maintenance
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS MAINTENANCE

GENERAL
WARRANTY
This product has been manufactured and tested to the highest quality standards by Ralco, srl.
Ralco undertakes to replace and repair any collimator during a period of 24 months for
mechanical and 12 months for electrical parts (motors, potentiometers, electrical boards,
lasers) from the date of invoice (shipment date from Ralco).
The warranty applies provided the product has been handled properly in accordance with its
operating instructions and its intended use.
Warranty covers cost of all components and labor involved, unless:
• Product documents have been altered in any way or made illegible;
• The model or production number on the product has been altered, deleted, removed or
made illegible;
• Repairs or product modifications and alterations have been performed by unauthorized and
unqualified persons;
• Unauthorized repairs and/or modifications have been performed;
• Damage caused by misuse or neglect, incorrect installation or accidental damage;
• Damage occurred during transit due to shipping company, or incorrect packing by cus-
tomer;
• Unoriginal spare parts and accessories have been used.
In-warranty spares will be available only upon return to Ralco, at the customer's expense, of
the parts considered to be faulty to allow Ralco to assess the cause of the fault.
Components Not Covered by this Warranty:
• Consumable items such as lamp bulbs, lexan panels and mirrors (if applicable);
• Cosmetic damage such as scratches;
• Any missing components when product arrives for repair.
REPAIRS
In the event the customer finds any Non Conformity in the product, please contact Ralco via e-
mail at the address: [email protected] (Ralco Repair Assistance).
To successfully resolve any Non Conformity, the following information must be provided:
• The model and serial number of the collimator found on the label;
• A detailed description of the problem (in Italian or English);
• Whether you want a repair, refurbishment, or model upgrade of the product.
Ralco and the customer will work together to resolve the problem by either providing
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS - General
instructions, and/or field service or by sending replacement parts.

In the event the collimator needs to be repaired at Ralco, you will be provided with a RMA
(Return Merchandise Authorization) number as your consent to the return. If a product is
returned to Ralco without a RMA or without a description of the problem, the customer will incur
a €100 processing fee.
If the product is returned under warranty and no defect is found, the customer incurs the cost
of evaluation, testing and shipping.
The shipping of the unit is at the customer’s expense if the unit is out of warranty.
The warranty period resets only on replaced parts once repairs are completed (shipment date
from Ralco back to customer), see paragraph, WARRANTY.
Ralco reserves the right to decide if the product is to be repaired or substituted.
MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS GENERAL

Please send defective material to the following address:

RALCO SRL
VIA DEI TIGLI 13/G
20853 BIASSONO (MB) - ITALIA
FAX: ++39-039-2497.799
EMAIL: [email protected]
END OF LIFE DISPOSAL

Your collimator contains materials which can be recycled and reused. Specialised companies
can recycle your product to increase the amount of reusable materials and to minimize the
amount of materials to be disposed of.
The product contains lead which can be highly contaminating if dispersed
incorrectly. The following symbol signifies that the product conforms to the
environmental requirements of directives 202/95/EC, 2002/96/EC, 2003/108/EC;
it must be disposed of correctly at the end of its life-cycle.
The collimator does not contain polluting materials or products with the exception
of the lead that composes the shutters - avoid direct contact with lead especially for prolonged
periods.
It is required that you observe Local Laws regulating the disposal of the collimator using
certified environmental management entities. Should this prove impossible, return the
collimator to Ralco at the purchaser's expense and Ralco will undertake its correct disposal.
If you are replacing the unit with new equipment, you may return the old collimator to Ralco.
Please contact us if you require further information.
DISASSEMBLY
WARNINGS
CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO LET THE COLLIMATOR FALL.
• Disconnect supply to the collimator.

• Remove the cover and disconnect the supply cables.

• Loosen the fixing Allen screws on the upper part of the collimator connected to the flange
mounted to the X-ray tube.
TRANSPORT AND STORAGE
ATTENZIONE
ANY DAMAGE TO THE COLLIMATOR DUE TO INCORRECT OR UNSUITABLE

PACKAGING IS THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE CUSTOMER. IF POSSIBLE, THE USE OF
ORIGINAL RALCO PACKAGING IS RECOMMENDED. IF THIS IS NOT POSSIBLE,
PLEASE FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS PROVIDED WITHIN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
IF THE COLLIMATOR IS NOT PACKAGED CORRECTLY, ALL WARRANTIES WILL BE
VOIDED.

In order to properly package the collimator for shipping the following materials are
needed:
• Plastic bag;
• Sturdy cardboard box properly sized for the collimator;
• Protective packaging (bubble wrap, bubble bags, air pillows, polyfoam etc.) -
• Packaging tape;
• Strapping.
Procedure:
1. Ensure all covers are remounted properly on the collimator if previously removed.
2. Place the collimator in the plastic bag to avoid packing material from entering the collima-
tor.
3. Place the collimator inside the cardboard box.
4. Use protective packaging to fill any empty spaces inside the cardboard box so that the col-
limator is stable during shipment.
5. Seal the cardboard box firmly so it will not open during shipping using high-quality packag-
ing tape.
6. Use strapping to ensure proper closure.
7. It is strongly recommended to pallet the packaging (especially when single collimators are
shipped) to ensure proper handling.
8. Ensure of the correct storage conditions:
• Ambient Temperature = from -40°C to +70°C
• Relative Humidity = from 10% to 95%
• Atm. Pressure = from 500 a 1060 hPa.
SAFETY/RESPONSIBILITY
Ralco adheres to the directives governing manufacturers of electro-medical equipment:
Directive 2007/47/CE para.10 -Legislative Decree n° 46 para.10
Ralco shall not be held responsible when instructions provided in the present manual are not
complied with. Ralco shall not be held responsible if the collimator relates to one or several of
the following instances:
• The unit is of Ralco construction, built to client specifications with no CE marking.
• The unit has been modified by the OEM or end user.
• The unit has been installed without respecting the instructions provided in this manual.
• The unit is used without respecting the instructions provided in this manual.
• The unit has not been subject to routine functional inspection.
• The unit has not been subject to routine maintenance.
• The unit has been repaired with unoriginal spare parts.
• Ralco shall decline all responsibility for any damage, direct or indirect, caused to persons
or things by inappropriate accessories.

WARNINGS
INFORMATION REGARDING ACCIDENTS THAT HAVE OCCURRED WHILE USING THE

RADIOLOGICAL COLLIMATOR MUST BE REPORTED IMMEDIATELY TO RALCO SRL.
RESIDUAL RISKS
The collimator has been constructed to current standards to meet the safety requisites of
directive 2007/47/CE. However, due to the presence of x-rays, the type of application implies
a residual risk derived from possible faults that could occur during operation of the unit.
The Instructions contained in the this Manual will ensure the correct use of the device and
reduce the causes of possible hazards.
The residual risks of the device are reasonable; they have been assessed and approved in the
related Risk Management Plan contained the Technical Report.

Information For The Manufacturer
The following form is provided for your comments and suggestions with regards to the collimator so that we
may ensure and improve the quality of our production.
Please e-mail comments and/or suggestions to: [email protected]
Date:
Customer:
Information regarding possible accidents that may have occurred while using the collimator.
Directive 2007/47/CE states that accidents (such as death or grievous injury to a patient) that involve the
collimator described herein, must be reported to the Ministry of Health and to the Manufacturer.
The present form is provided to report to Ralco srl post-free.
Date:
Customer:
info_cl.fm
info_cl.fm

Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Instruction Manual

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS

SERIES R 225 ACS DHHS

DATE OF ISSUE: REVISION LEVEL: ISSUED BY:

THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL

THE CONTENTS OF THIS MANUAL MUST ONLY BE

RALCO DOES NOT EXPRESSLY OR IMPLICITLY GRANT ANY

R 225 ACS STANDARD VERSION

FDA CERTIFIED VERSION AVAILABLE ON

INTRODUCTION CANSYSTEM RALCO R 225 ACS

Data Reading ................................................47 RSR008 ......................................................137

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS i

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS

General Safety Information

Intended Use of the Collimator

Installer and Operator Responsibility

X-ray equipment manufacturer responsibility

The collimator was modified in any way by the OEM or operator;

The collimator was not installed by competent personnel;

The Collimator was Used in a Way Not Reasonably Foreseen by Ralco

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INTRODUCTION

21 CFR subchapter J (FDA)

Inherent Danger of X-Rays

Read all information in this chapter carefully.

If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of serious injury.

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INTRODUCTION

Precautions Against Mechanical Hazards

Hazard of physical injury caused by heavy loads

Safe handling of light source

Precautions Against Electrical Hazards

Hazard of electrical shock during service tasks

If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of property damage.

General precautions against electrical hazards

Precautions concerning installation and service

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INTRODUCTION

Working when connected to voltages

Safe handling of high-voltage cables

Precaution Against Material Damage

Cleaning and disinfection

Malfunction through electromagnetic fields

If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of property damage.

If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of property damage.

Damage by electrostatic discharge (ESD)

If you do not obey these instructions, there is a risk of property damage.

Additional symbols on the collimator (if applicable)

or AC Alternating Current No. 01-14 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 503

or DC Direct Current No. 01-18 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5031

MTR 225 ACS - MTR 225 ACS DHHS INTRODUCTION

Protective Ground No. 01-20 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5019

Plus, Positive Polarity No. 01-27 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5019

Minus, Negative Polarity No. 01-28 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5006

Input No. 01-36 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5006

Output No. 01-37 Ref. IEC 417-IEC 5034

Remote Control No. 01-38 Ref.

Manual Control No. 01-45 ISO 7000-096

Automatic Control (Closed Loop) No. 01-46 ISO 7000-0017

Iris Diaphragm: Open No. 01-69 ISO 7000-0017

Iris Diaphragm: Closed No. 01-70 Ref. 417-IEC 5324

Radiation Filter or Filtration No. 04-51 Ref. 417-IEC 5381

Light Indicator of Radiation Field No. 04-51 Ref. 417-IEC 5381